JP7630816B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Some pachinko gaming machines execute a predetermined initialization process when the power is turned on, and then execute a main loop process (for example, paragraph 0055 of Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-131353 A

However, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing convenience and enhancing interest in games.

In view of the above circumstances, the present invention aims to improve convenience and further increase interest in games.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises an acquisition means for acquiring judgment information when a gaming ball enters a starting hole, a judgment means for judging whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be executed based on the judgment information, a pre-judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information before the judgment, a storage means for retaining and storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been made, an adjustment operation means for performing an adjustment operation of a volume value, and a performance control means for controlling performance, the performance control means being capable of displaying a recovery display on a display means when power supply is started, being capable of performing an adjustment process of the volume value in a sound output means when the adjustment operation of the volume value is performed, being capable of performing an adjustment process of the volume value when the adjustment operation of the volume value is performed while the recovery display is being displayed, being capable of outputting an adjustment sound from the sound output means when the adjustment operation of the volume value is performed, and being capable of increasing the volume value when the volume value is at a maximum value. when an adjustment operation is performed to reduce the number of reserved memories, the adjustment sound is not output, and reserved information corresponding to the number of reserved memories is displayed on the display means; second reserved information suggesting that the special game is more likely to be executed than the first reserved information is displayed according to the preliminary determination, and the second reserved information is displayed in a specific color different from the first reserved information; when the second reserved information is displayed, a predetermined effect sound is output from the sound output means and a predetermined light-emitting means is made to emit a light of a light corresponding to the specific color; when a game ball enters the starting hole while the recovery display is being displayed and it is determined to display the second reserved information according to the preliminary determination, the second reserved information is made visible without making the second reserved information visible , and the predetermined effect sound is output and the predetermined light-emitting means is made to emit a light of a light corresponding to the specific color , and the second reserved information is made visible after the display of the recovery display has been terminated.

According to the present invention, convenience can be improved and interest in games can be further increased.

1 is a front view of the appearance of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a block diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing a special pattern winning determination table and a normal pattern winning determination table according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing a special symbol determination table and a normal symbol determination table according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a game state transition diagram according to an embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a special pattern variation pattern table according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4A and 4B are diagrams illustrating a determination information storage area of a main RAM and a counter of the main RAM according to an embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing a main control board main process according to the embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing a setting value changing process according to the embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing a setting value confirmation process according to the embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main control board timer interrupt process according to an embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing an input SW detection process according to the embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the processing performed when detecting the first starting hole in an embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the processing performed when a second starting hole is detected in an embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of detecting a passage gate according to the embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related process according to an embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of special pattern fluctuation according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during special pattern fluctuation according to an embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing processing for each game state according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning game process according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing an abnormality determination process according to the embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control board according to the embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance control board timer interrupt processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing an operation device input process according to the embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a main command receiving process (1/2) according to the embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a main command receiving process (2/2) according to the embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a time-saving B suggestion effect according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the winning sound, the variable sound, and the starting port light-emitting device (color) for each icon in an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a main process of an image and sound control unit according to the embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a process performed when a volume value/light amount value related subcommand is received according to the embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing performed when a starting port related sub-command is received according to an embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing an image/sound control unit timer interrupt process according to the embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing a main process of a light emission drive control unit according to the embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of a light emission drive control unit according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram of an image generation process according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a first example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a second example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a second example (another example) of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a third example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a fourth example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a fifth example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a sixth example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a sixth example (another example) of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a seventh example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an eighth example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a ninth example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a ninth example (another example) of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a tenth example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an eleventh example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a twelfth example of a notification mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a time chart 1 showing characteristic parts of trigger 1 and trigger 2 according to an embodiment of the present invention. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating modified examples of the characteristic parts of trigger 1 and trigger 2 according to the embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a time chart 2 showing characteristic parts of trigger 1 and trigger 2 according to an embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a time chart 3 showing characteristic parts of trigger 1 and trigger 2 according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a time chart showing an example of execution of a time-saving B suggestion effect according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a time chart showing an example of execution of a time-saving B suggestion effect (variant example 1) according to an embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a time chart showing an example of execution of a time-saving B suggestion effect (variant 2) according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a time chart 1 showing a characteristic portion of a time-saving B entry fluctuation according to an embodiment of the present invention; 11 is a time chart 2 showing a characteristic portion of the time-saving B entry fluctuation according to the embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a time chart 1 illustrating triggers 1 and 2 in a normal gaming state according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a time chart 2 illustrating trigger 1 and trigger 2 in a normal gaming state according to an embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a time chart 3 illustrating trigger 1 and trigger 2 in a normal gaming state according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a time chart illustrating a relationship between musical pieces that can be outputted at trigger 1 and trigger 2 according to the embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a time chart 1 illustrating a time-saving game state A entered at trigger 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, and a time-saving game state B entered at trigger 2. 11 is a time chart illustrating the presentation mode in the normal gaming state after the time-saving gaming state has ended in an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a time chart 2 explaining a time-saving game state A entered at trigger 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention, and a time-saving game state B entered at trigger 2. 11 is a time chart showing an example of updating a play count counter for activating a time-saving play state B according to an embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a time chart showing an example (variant example 1) of updating a play count counter for activating a time-saving play state B according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a time chart showing an example (variant example 2) of updating the play count counter for activating the time-saving play state B according to an embodiment of the present invention.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine 1 will be used as an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention. In the following description, "front," "back," "left," "right," "upper," and "lower" refer to the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 as seen from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine 1 has an outer frame 2 for installation on a game machine installation island (not shown) in an amusement parlor, a middle frame 3 pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and removably holding a game board 6 shown in FIG. 3, a glass frame 4 pivotally supported by the middle frame 3 and facing the front of the game board 6, allowing the game board 6 to be viewed through transparent glass, and a tray member 5 pivotally supported by the middle frame 3 and located below the glass frame 4, capable of storing game balls. The glass frame 4 and the tray member 5 may be configured as separate types or as an integrated type.

The middle frame 3 is provided with a launching device for launching the game balls into the game area 7 of the game board 6, and a launching handle 8 for causing the launching device to perform a launching operation. The launching handle 8 is held by the player and can be rotated within a predetermined range, and the launch strength when launching the game balls into the game area 7 can be adjusted depending on the amount of rotation (volume). For example, when the launching handle 8 is rotated a first amount of rotation (first launch strength), the game ball is launched to the left of the game area 7 (so-called "left hit" is possible), and when the launching handle 8 is rotated a second amount of rotation larger than the first amount of rotation (second launch strength), the game ball is launched to the right of the game area 7 (so-called "right hit" is possible).

Although not shown, the launch handle 8 is provided with a handle touch sensor. This handle touch sensor turns ON when the player is holding the launch handle 8, and the ON signal is input to the payout control board 300. This makes it possible to know that the launch handle 8 is being held by the player.

The glass frame 4 is also provided with a light-emitting device 9 (lamp, LED, etc.) that can be used to decorate the pachinko gaming machine 1 by emitting light. For example, when a win is determined in the special symbol win determination process described below, the device can emit rainbow light to notify the player that a win has occurred.

In addition, a speaker 10 is provided on the glass frame 4 (above), and is capable of outputting music (BGM = background music), voice, and sound effects. For example, when a normal game state described below is controlled, music corresponding to the normal game state can be output, and when a time-saving game state (A, B) described below is controlled, music corresponding to the time-saving game state (A, B) can be output.
A lower speaker 10 is provided below the glass frame 4, and is capable of outputting voice and sound effects. A speaker lamp 10a is provided on the lower speaker 10, and is configured to emit light during a flash effect when a prize is won, which will be described later.

The light-emitting device 9 and speaker 10 can issue an abnormality alert when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the light-emitting device 9 can emit light in a lighting pattern specifically designed for abnormality alerts, and the speaker 10 can output a voice or warning sound that alerts the user to the specific details of the abnormality.

The tray member 5 is composed of an upper tray 5a and a lower tray 5b, and when the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 5a exceeds a certain amount, the game balls are dispensed into the lower tray 5b. The tray member 5 is also provided with a ball removal button 11 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 5a into the lower tray 5b at the end of a game, a ball lending button 12 for requesting the payout of game balls from a game ball lending device (not shown), a card return button 13 for requesting the return of a valuable medium inserted into the insertion port of the game ball lending device, a balance display 12a for displaying the remaining balance of the valuable medium, and a ball lending available lamp 12b for notifying that ball lending is possible by operating the ball lending button 12.

The tray member 5 is also provided with an effect button 14 and an effect lever 15 that can be operated by the player when an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate each operating means (for example, an effect in which an image that resembles an operating means and an image that says "Press the operating means!" are displayed) is executed. Note that the effect button 14 and the effect lever 15 may be provided independently of each other, or may be provided as a single unit.

Also, a vibration device may be provided on one or both of the effect button 14 and effect lever 15 to vibrate them. For example, they may vibrate as a jackpot advance notice (vibration advance notice), or to notify the player of a win game or a transition to a sure-win game state. The vibration advance notice is more likely to be executed when a win game has been won, and is positioned as an advance notice notice that generates high expectations for a win game among all jackpot advance notice notices (for example, jackpot advance notice notice B, described below).

The tray member 5 is also provided with a cross key button 16 that can be operated by the player to adjust the volume of the music (BGM), voice, and sound effects output from the speaker 10, adjust the amount of light emitted from the light-emitting device 9, adjust the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26 described below, and activate the menu screen to perform operations corresponding to each menu. Note that the cross key button 16 may be provided as an operating device for performing operations related to the menu screen, with dedicated operating devices for adjusting the volume and light amount being provided separately and independently.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIG. 2. On the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various control boards such as the main control board 100, the performance control board 200, the payout control board 300 and the payout device 304, and the power supply board 400 are provided (to be precise, these various control boards are attached to the rear side of the middle frame 3).

The main control board 100 is also provided with a RAM clear switch 105. The RAM clear switch 105 is a switch for initializing game information that is rewritten as games are played in the main RAM 103 area. For example, if the game arcade closes while the game is in the time-saving game state (A or B), the manager (e.g., game store clerk) can turn the power ON while pressing the RAM clear switch 105 to clear the game information in the time-saving game state (A or B), and the game can be restarted from the normal game state when the game opens the next day. In addition, if the manager (e.g., game store clerk) turns the power ON while pressing the RAM clear switch 105, the value of the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B described below is cleared.

The RAM clear switch 105 is also a switch for switching the setting value in the setting change state described below. Details will be described later in the flowchart, but for example, in the case of six setting values, when the setting value "1" is displayed on the display 104 described below, pressing the RAM clear switch 105 once switches the setting value from "1" to "2", and when the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once again, the setting value switches from "2" to "3", and thereafter, each time the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed once, the setting value switches to "4", "5", and "6", and when the setting value "6" is displayed on the display 104, pressing the RAM clear switch 105 once switches the setting value from "6" to "1".

Although the RAM clear switch 105 is provided on the main control board 100, it may be provided on the power supply board 400 or directly on the inner frame 3, for example, as long as it can be input to the main control board 100.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a setting change keyhole 31 (also referred to as a setting key SW in this embodiment). The setting change keyhole 31 is used when setting one of the multiple setting value stages described below. Specifically, when a setting change key (not shown) managed by a gaming parlor staff member is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (rotating from vertical to horizontal), and the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned ON (power SW 400a is turned ON) while pressing the above-mentioned RAM clear switch 105, the setting change state in which a setting value can be set is entered. Details of the setting change state will be described later in the flow chart.

The setting change keyhole 31 is also used to check the currently set setting values. Specifically, when a setting change key managed by a store clerk is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (from vertical to horizontal), and the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned ON (power SW 400a is turned ON), the machine enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values can be checked. Details of the setting confirmation state will be described later in the flow chart.

The setting change keyhole 31 can be rotated by the setting change key, and for example, the main CPU 101 can detect three positions (states) in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction.

Note that, although the setting change keyhole 31 is provided on the main control board 100, the location of the installation is not limited to this. For example, the setting change keyhole 31 may be provided on the middle frame 3.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a display 104. If the display 104 is in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the setting value is displayed, and if the display 104 is not in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display 104 displays game performance information calculated, for example, using the formula "(number of game balls paid out in normal game state ÷ number of outs in normal game state) × 100".

In addition, when the game performance information is not in a setting change state or setting confirmation state (for example, when interrupts are permitted in step S19 of FIG. 10), a process of calculating the game performance information is performed for each interrupt (for example, every 4 ms), and the current section and three previous sections (one section before, two sections before, and three sections before) can be displayed at each specified display timing (for example, every 5 seconds). That is, the display is switched as follows: display of the current section → a specified time has elapsed (5 seconds has elapsed) → display of the past section (1) → a specified time has elapsed (5 seconds has elapsed) → display of the past section (2) → a specified time has elapsed (5 seconds has elapsed) → display of the past section (3) → a specified time has elapsed (5 seconds has elapsed) → display of the current section.

Next, the configuration of the game board 6 of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained with reference to Figure 3. The game board 6 is made of plywood or a transparent synthetic resin material, and an image display device 26 is removably attached to the back side. The game board 6 also has a game area 7 in which game balls can roll, and an outer rail member 18 and an inner rail member 19 for guiding game balls shot out from the launching device to the game area 7. In addition, the game area 7 is provided with a gate member 20 through which game balls can pass, a first starting hole 21 through which game balls can enter, a stage 17 for facilitating entry into the first starting hole 21, a second starting hole 22 through which game balls can enter, a normal winning hole 23 through which game balls can enter, a big winning hole 24 through which game balls can enter when a winning game (see FIG. 22) described below is being played, an outlet 25 for discharging game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area (a game ball discharge gutter), a movable body 28 that can move up and down, and other components such as game nails (not shown) and a windmill.

The play area 7 has a first play area 7a (a play area for so-called "left-hand hits") formed to the left of the center, and a second play area 7b (a play area for so-called "right-hand hits") formed to the right of the center.

The gate member 20 is provided in the right central part of the game area 7, and allows the game ball to pass through when a so-called "right shot" is being performed, in which the game ball is shot to the right side of the game area 7. In addition, it is always open upward, and always allows the game ball to pass through. When a game ball passes through the gate member 20 and is detected by the gate detection SW 20a, the "passing gate detection time processing" described below is performed, and a "normal pattern hit determination processing" is performed to determine whether or not to protrude a protruding member (not shown) provided in the second starting hole 22, and a "normal pattern change game" is executed in which the determination result of the normal pattern hit determination processing is derived after the normal pattern change time has elapsed. The gate member 20 may also be provided in the left central part of the game area 7.

When a normal pattern change game based on passing through gate member 20 is being played, if a game ball also passes through gate member 20, the execution of the normal pattern change game based on that passage is put on hold, and up to a maximum of "4" balls can be put on hold, excluding the normal pattern change game that is being played. Specifically, a reserved memory area for the normal symbol changing game is provided in the main RAM 103, and the reserved memory area is composed of a "change memory area" corresponding to the currently changing normal symbol changing game, a "first memory area" corresponding to the normal symbol changing game that will be played after the currently changing normal symbol changing game ends, and then a "second memory area", a "third memory area", and a "fourth memory area". When the currently changing normal symbol changing game ends, the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "first memory area" is transferred to the "change memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "second memory area" is transferred to the "first memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "third memory area" is transferred to the "second memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "fourth memory area" is transferred to the "third memory area", and the "fourth memory area" becomes empty.

The first starting hole 21 is provided in the center of the game area 7, and is capable of receiving a game ball when a so-called "left shot" is being performed, in which the game ball is shot to the left side of the game area 7. The first starting hole 21 is always open upward, and always allows game balls to enter. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 and is detected by the first starting hole detection SW 21a, for example, a "3" game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and if any reserved memory area is empty in addition to the prize balls, a "pattern change game" is executed in which a special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image described below are displayed in a variable manner, and the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process (special symbol and decorative symbol) is derived (determined display) after the variable time has elapsed.

When a symbol change game based on a ball entering the first starting hole 21 is being played, if another game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the execution of the symbol change game based on that ball entry is put on hold, and up to four balls can be put on hold, excluding the symbol change game that is being played.

Specifically, a reserved memory area for the symbol change game is provided in the main RAM 103, and the reserved memory area is composed of a "change memory area" corresponding to the currently changing symbol change game, a "first memory area" corresponding to the symbol change game to be played after the currently changing symbol change game ends, and the "second memory area", "third memory area", and "fourth memory area" as shown in FIG. 9(A). When the currently changing symbol change game ends with judgment information (random number value) stored in all reserved memory areas, the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "first memory area" is transferred to the "change memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "second memory area" is transferred to the "first memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "third memory area" is transferred to the "second memory area", the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "fourth memory area" is transferred to the "third memory area", and the "fourth memory area" becomes empty. Although the first starting hole 21 is an entrance hole through which the game ball can enter, it may also be configured as a passage area through which the game ball can pass.

A starting hole light emitting device 21a is provided around the first starting hole 21. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the starting hole light emitting device 21a can emit light to notify the player that the ball has entered the hole, or, when a reserved ball pre-reading performance is performed (described later), emit light in the same color as the reserved icon that is the target of the reserved ball pre-reading performance.

The second starting hole 22 is located in the right center of the game area 7, and is capable of accepting game balls when a so-called "right hit" is performed, in which the game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 7. Unlike the first starting hole 21, the second starting hole 22 is not always open upward, and does not allow game balls to enter as a general rule (is in a "closed" state). In other words, the second starting hole 22 has a protruding member that can protrude forward, and only when this protruding member protrudes forward (when in an "open" state) is the second starting hole 22 capable of accepting game balls.

Regarding whether or not the protruding member is protruded forward to allow the game ball to enter, when a normal symbol hit is determined in the normal symbol hit determination process, it can be opened and closed in the opening and closing manner shown in "Opening and closing manner of the second start hole" in FIG. 6 described later. When a game ball enters the second start hole 22 and is detected by the second start hole detection SW 22a, for example, a "2" game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and if any reserved memory area is free in addition to the prize ball, a symbol change game is executed.

When a symbol change game based on a ball entering the second starting hole 22 is being played, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 22, the execution of the symbol change game based on that ball entry is put on hold, and up to four balls can be put on hold, excluding the symbol change game being played. The specific configuration of the main RAM 103 related to the hold is the same as that of the first starting hole 21 described above, so a description is omitted.

Although a protruding member that can move in the forward and backward directions is used as the second starting opening 22, a so-called "electric tulip" with movable wings may also be used. Although the second starting opening 22 is an entrance through which game balls can enter, it may also be configured as a passing area through which game balls can pass. Although the second starting opening 22 is provided in the second game area 7b, it may also be provided in the first game area 7a.

In this embodiment, the series of steps in which a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22, a special symbol hit determination process is performed, the special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image are displayed in a variable manner, and the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process (special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image) is derived (determined display) after the variation time has elapsed is sometimes referred to as a "symbol change game" or simply as a "one-change game." In addition, the period when the "symbol change game" is being played is sometimes referred to as a "variable display."

When one game ball enters the first starting hole 21, a "pattern change game" based on the entry of one game ball is executed by the first special pattern display 27a and the image display device 26, and when one game ball enters the second starting hole 22, a "pattern change game" based on the entry of one game ball is executed by the second special pattern display 27b and the image display device 26. Therefore, the "pattern change game" refers to the general term for the game played by the first special pattern display 27a and the image display device 26, and the general term for the game played by the second special pattern display 27b and the image display device 26.

In addition, in this embodiment, deriving the determination result of the special pattern hit determination process (special pattern, decorative pattern image, and fourth pattern image) after the change time in the pattern change game has elapsed is referred to as a "confirmed display" (of the special pattern, decorative pattern image, and fourth pattern image). A "confirmed display" is a state in which the special pattern, decorative pattern image, and fourth pattern image have completely stopped. On the other hand, in a pattern change game, temporarily stopping the decorative pattern image before the change time has elapsed is referred to as a "provisional stop display" of the decorative pattern image. Examples of a "provisional stop display" include a "reach" as described below, and a "swinging change display" before a "confirmed display". The "swinging variable display" before the "confirmed display" is, for example, a variable display that occurs at a branching point where the decorative pattern image is "temporarily stopped" at, for example, "767" and then "confirmedly displayed" as "767", or a missing "767" is temporarily "temporarily stopped", a reversal is performed to derive "777", and then "777" is "confirmedly displayed".

There are four regular winning holes 23, three at the lower left and one at the lower right of the game area 7. The three regular winning holes 23 at the lower left are capable of receiving game balls when a so-called "left hit" is being performed, and the one regular winning hole 23 at the lower right is capable of receiving game balls when a so-called "right hit" is being performed. The regular winning holes 23 are always open upward like the first starting hole 21, and always allow game balls to enter. When a game ball enters the regular winning hole 23 and is detected by the regular winning hole detection SW 23a, for example, eight game balls are paid out as prize balls. The positions of the regular winning holes 23 can be changed arbitrarily, and the number of the regular winning holes 23 may be less than four. Also, the number of winning balls may be different between the "3" regular winning holes 23 on the lower left and the "1" regular winning hole 23 on the lower right.

The big prize opening 24 is located in the lower right part of the game area 7, and is capable of receiving game balls when a so-called "right hit" is being performed. The big prize opening 24 also has an opening/closing door, and when a win is determined in the special symbol winning determination process, a winning game is executed and the opening/closing door tilts forward to allow the game ball to enter. When a game ball enters the big prize opening 24 and is detected by the big prize opening detection SW 24a, for example, a "12" game ball is paid out as a prize ball.

Here, in a winning game, the opening and closing door of the big prize opening 24 opens (tilts forward) for the number of awarded rounds shown in FIG. 6. Then, it opens (tilts forward) for 29.5 S (S = seconds) per round, and if the big prize opening detection SW 24a detects that 10 game balls have entered before 29.5 S has elapsed, the opening and closing door closes and the game proceeds to the next round even before 29.5 S has elapsed, and this is repeated for the specified number of rounds. On the other hand, if 29.5 S has elapsed before the big prize opening detection SW 24a detects that 10 game balls have entered (so-called "attacker full open"), the opening and closing door closes and the game proceeds to the next round. In this case, the player is at a disadvantage because one round of play ends before the specified number of balls per round, which is 10 balls, is reached.

In this embodiment, a door that tilts forward is used as the big prize opening 24, but a so-called "electric tulip" or a "shutter member" that moves back and forth may also be used. Also, the game area 7 may have multiple big prize openings.

The image display device 26 has a display area covering almost the entire area, is provided so as to be located above the stage 17, and is capable of displaying a symbol-changing game and performance images in the display area. In other words, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 or the second starting hole 22 and a special symbol hit determination process is performed, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c are changed (vertical scroll) in the variable display area. Note that, regardless of whether a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 or the second starting hole 22, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c are changed (vertical scroll) in the variable display area (the special symbol display device is different, but the decorative symbol images used in the image display device 26 are the same).

Then, within the change time, a performance image is displayed, and when the change time has elapsed, if there is a win, for example, the "7" is stopped on each decorative pattern image, and the decorative pattern combination of "777" is displayed as a confirmed result, thereby informing the player that there is a win. On the other hand, if there is a loss, for example, the decorative pattern combination of "765" is displayed as a confirmed result, thereby informing the player that there is a loss.

In addition to each decorative pattern image, a fourth pattern image 26d (the fourth pattern following the above-mentioned left decorative pattern image 26a, center decorative pattern image 26b, and right decorative pattern image 26c) can be displayed in the lower right of the display area, and variable display and fixed display are possible in sync with each decorative pattern image. The image display device 26 also displays a first start port reserved ball number image 26e that displays the number of reserved balls for the pattern change game in the first start port 21 with "0" to "4", a second start port reserved ball number image 26f that displays the number of reserved balls for the pattern change game in the second start port 22 with "0" to "4", a first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, a first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, and a first start port third reserved ball image display area 26f that displays the number of reserved balls for the pattern change game in the first start port 21 with reserved ball images. i, the first start port fourth reserved ball image 26 display area j (in FIG. 3, simply indicated as "g", "h", "i", and "j"); the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l, the second start port third reserved ball image display area 26m, and the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n (in FIG. 3, simply indicated as "k", "l", "m", and "n") that display the number of reserved balls in the pattern change game in the second start port 22 with reserved ball images. Also, the variable icon display area 26o (in FIG. 3, simply indicated as "o") that displays an icon image corresponding to the currently executed pattern change game can be displayed.

In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port reserved ball number image 26e and the number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j are in principle synchronized (except when a command error, etc. occurs), and the number of reserved balls displayed in the second start port reserved ball number image 26f and the number of reserved balls displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k to the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n are in principle synchronized (except when a command error, etc. occurs). For example, if "4" is displayed in the first start port reserved ball number image 26e, "4" reserved ball images will be displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j.

The number of reserved balls displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e and the number of reserved balls displayed as the second start port reserved ball number image 26f may be referred to as "number reserved balls" below. Also, the reserved ball images displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j, and the reserved ball images displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l, the second start port third reserved ball image display area 26m, and the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n may be referred to as "reserved icons" below. Also, the icon image displayed in the variable icon display area 26o may be referred to as the "variable icon" below. Also, the variable icon and the reserved icon may be collectively referred to simply as "icon".

The variable icon display area 26o, the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j, the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l, the second start port third reserved ball image display area 26m, and the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n are displayed on the image display device 26, but are not limited to this and may be displayed on an LED or lamp, or may be displayed on a display device other than the image display device 26 (for example, a second image display device, a so-called "sub-liquid crystal").

The left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, the right decorative pattern image 26c, and the fourth pattern image 26d can display pattern images from "1" to "8", and if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a hit, any of the pattern combinations "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", "666", "777", or "888" can be displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, it is possible to display a symbol combination other than the above-mentioned symbol combination. If the result is a miss, and a special symbol change pattern accompanied by a "reach" is determined in the special symbol change pattern described below, a symbol combination such as "767" will be displayed as confirmed, and if a special symbol change pattern without a "reach" is determined, a symbol combination such as "765" will be displayed as confirmed.

Note that "reach" refers to a state in which the left decorative pattern image 26a and the right decorative pattern image 26c display the same number image (temporary stop display), and the center decorative pattern image 26b displays a variable pattern (the pattern images displayed as temporary stops and the variable pattern images are not limited to this). In this embodiment, if the result of the "special pattern hit determination process" is a hit, the process is configured to always go through "reach," so it can be said that this is a state in which the player can expect a winning game.

In addition, the fourth pattern image 26d may not be a combination of the above-mentioned patterns, but may simply display a single digit number, a two digit number, or a symbol or character, and may be able to distinguish winning or losing, and the type of pattern, by differences in the luminous color.

The symbol display device 27 is provided outside the game area (outside the outer rail member 18), which is an area of the game board 6 different from the game area 7. As shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is provided with a first special symbol display 27a that is display-controlled by the main control board 100 and executes a symbol change game based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21, and a second special symbol display 27b that executes a symbol change game based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 22. Here, the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b are configured with 7-segment displays, and in the symbol change game, the special symbol is made to flash "-" (horizontal bar pattern) from the start of the change, and when it is time to derive the judgment result of the special symbol hit judgment process, if it is a miss, the "-" (horizontal bar pattern) is lit (confirmed display), and if it is a hit, for example, "7" is lit (confirmed display). In other words, the "special pattern" refers to a pattern whose display is controlled by the main control board 100.

In this embodiment, the "special pattern" and the above-mentioned left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, right decorative pattern image 26c, and fourth pattern image 26d may be simply referred to as "patterns" or "identification information." Furthermore, the left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, and right decorative pattern image 26c managed by the performance control board 200 may be simply referred to as "decorative patterns." Furthermore, the left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, right decorative pattern image 26c, and fourth pattern image 26d managed by the performance control board 200 may be collectively referred to as "sub-patterns."

As shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is provided with a first special symbol reserved indicator 27c, which is display controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the number of reserved symbols for the symbol change game based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21, and a second special symbol reserved indicator 27d, which displays the number of reserved symbols for the symbol change game based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 22.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 27c and the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d each consist of two dot LED indicators, and can display the number of reserved balls by turning them off, on, or blinking. For example, when the number of reserved balls is "0", both dot LED indicators are "off", when the number of reserved balls is "1", one is "on" and the other is "off", when the number of reserved balls is "2", both are "on", when the number of reserved balls is "3", one is "on" and the other is "blinking", and when the number of reserved balls is "4", both are "blinking".

In addition, the first special pattern reserved indicator 27c is synchronized in principle with the number of reserved balls displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e and the number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (except when a command error or the like occurs), and the second special pattern reserved indicator 27d is synchronized in principle with the number of reserved balls displayed as the second start port reserved ball number image 26f and the number of reserved balls displayed as the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k to the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n (except when a command error or the like occurs). For example, when both first special pattern reserved indicators 27c are "blinking" (when there are four reserved balls), "4" is displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e, and "4" reserved ball images are displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. In the following, the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c and the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d may be referred to as the "main reserved indicator."

Note that the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c and the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d are each configured with two dot LED indicators, but are not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device whose display is controlled by the main control board 100 may be provided, and the display may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

As shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is provided with a normal symbol display 27e that is display controlled by the main control board 100 and executes a normal symbol variation game based on the passage of a game ball through the gate member 20. The normal symbol display 27e is composed of two dot LED displays, and in the normal symbol variation game, from the start of the variation, it repeatedly switches one on and the other off, and switches one off and the other on, and when it is time to derive the result of the normal symbol hit determination process, it displays a confirmation by turning one on and turning the other off if there is a miss, and a confirmation by turning one off and turning the other on if there is a normal hit.

As shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is provided with a normal symbol reserved indicator 27f, which is display controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the number of reserved symbols for the normal symbol variation game based on the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20. Note that the normal symbol reserved indicator 27f is composed of two dot LED indicators, similar to the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c and the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d described above, and the display format of the reserved number is also the same, so a detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is also provided with a round indicator 27g, which is display controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the "number of rounds (see the number of awarded rounds in FIG. 6)" indicating the number of times the large prize opening 24 is opened in the winning game described above. The round indicator 27g is composed of "4" dot LED indicators, and as shown in FIG. 6, there are 5 rounds and 10 rounds. For example, if a win occurs with special symbol A, the LED indicator for 10 rounds lights up and the others are turned off, and if a win occurs with special symbol B, the LED indicator for 5 rounds lights up and the others are turned off.

The game board 6 is also provided with a number of board lighting devices 29 (e.g., full-color LEDs), which, when the power is on to the pachinko game machine 1, emit light in a predetermined light pattern, enhancing the decorativeness of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, as shown by reference numeral 29 in FIG. 3, the board lighting devices 29 can decorate the entire game area 7 of the game board 6. In addition, all of the board lighting devices 29 can be turned off to highlight the display content of the image display device 26. The predetermined light emission pattern is made up of a number of light emission patterns that specify the light emission speed, light emission color, and which LEDs are to be emitted and which are not to be emitted.

In addition, on the right side of the image display device 26 (the so-called "center role"), a first special symbol sub-reserved indicator 29a, a second special symbol sub-reserved indicator 29b, and a right-hit indicator 29c are provided as one aspect of the board lighting device 29. The first special symbol sub-reserved indicator 29a and the second special symbol sub-reserved indicator 29b are controlled by the performance control board 200, and each is composed of two dot LED indicators, and it is possible to display the number of reserved balls by "turning off", "turning on", and "flashing". For example, when the number of reserved balls is "0", both dot LED indicators are "turned off", when the number of reserved balls is "1", one is "turned on" and the other is "turned off", when the number of reserved balls is "2", both are "turned on", when the number of reserved balls is "3", one is "turned on" and the other is "flashing", and when the number of reserved balls is "4", both are "flashing".

In addition, the first special pattern sub-reserve display 29a is, in principle, synchronized with the number of reserved balls displayed as the first starting port reserved ball number image 26e and the number of reserved balls displayed in the first starting port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (except when a command error, etc. occurs), and the second special pattern sub-reserve display 29b is, in principle, synchronized with the number of reserved balls displayed as the second starting port reserved ball number image 26f and the number of reserved balls displayed as the second starting port first reserved ball image display area 26k to the second starting port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n (except when a command error, etc. occurs). For example, when both first special symbol sub-reserve indicators 29a are "flashing" (when there are four reserved balls), "4" is displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e, and "4" reserved ball images are displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. In the following, the first special symbol sub-reserve indicator 29a and the second special symbol sub-reserve indicator 29b may be referred to as "sub-reserve indicators."

Note that the first special symbol sub-reserved display 29a and the second special symbol sub-reserved display 29b are each configured with two dot LED displays, but this is not limited to this. For example, they may be displayed on a display device other than the image display device 26 (e.g., a second image display device, a so-called "sub-liquid crystal display").

The right-hit indicator 29c is display-controlled by the performance control board 200, and for example, lights up based on receiving an opening command during a winning game, or based on receiving a game state command (high probability) or a game state command (time-saving). This can encourage the player to make a right-hit. On the other hand, it is turned off during a normal game state (turned off based on receiving a game state command (normal)), which can encourage the player to make a left-hit. Note that the right-hit indicator 29c is turned off to encourage the player to make a left-hit, but a left-hit indicator may be provided and turned on to encourage the player to make a left-hit.

Next, the internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (block diagram of the control system) will be explained based on FIG. 4. Note that the explanation of the configuration of the gaming board 6 in FIG. 3 will be omitted as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main control board 100, a performance control board 200, a payout control board 300, and a power supply board 400 on the rear side of the middle frame 3 (see FIG. 2). As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 and the performance control board 200 are connected via a harness or the like (not shown) so that only one-way communication is possible from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200. The main control board 100 and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness or the like so that two-way communication is possible. The payout control board 300 is connected to the performance control board 200 so that only one-way communication is possible from the payout control board 300 to the performance control board 200. The power supply board 400 is connected so that it can receive external power via a power plug (not shown) and supply the supplied external power to any of the main control board 100, the performance control board 200, and the payout control board 300.

The main control board 100 is connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to allow input from various switches, and is also connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to allow display control for various displays and drive control for various solenoids. The performance control board 200 is connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to allow input from various switches, and is also connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to allow display control for various displays.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main CPU 101 that performs control processing related to the progress of the game, a main ROM 102 that stores the control programs necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game, and a main RAM 103 that can read and write the data necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game. In addition to these, although not shown in the figure, it also has an interrupt controller circuit that issues an interrupt signal to the main CPU 101, a hardware random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, and the like. The control processing related to the progress of the game in the main CPU 101 will be described in detail later using a flowchart.

The main RAM 103 also has storage areas (not shown) for managing various information. For example, these include a setting value storage area for storing setting value information, a special symbol status flag storage area for storing the status of special symbols, a game status storage area for storing the game status, a winning status storage area for storing the status in a winning game, a normal symbol status flag storage area for storing the status of normal symbols, and a normal symbol winning status storage area for storing the status in a normal symbol winning game.

The main RAM 103 also has counters (see FIG. 9) for managing various information (time and number of times). For example, there are a time-saving game state B activation game number counter for counting (counting and storing) the number of times the pattern change game has been played in the normal game state and the time-saving game state A, a time-saving game state game number counter for counting (counting and storing) the number of times the pattern change game has been played in the time-saving game state (A, B), a probability change game state game number counter for counting (counting and storing) the number of times the pattern change game has been played in the probability change game state, a time management counter for managing various times, and a round number counter for managing the number of rounds in a winning game.

The play count counter for activating time-saving game state B starts counting from the start of time-saving game state A after the end of a winning game, and continues to carry over the counter value even when time-saving game state A ends and transitions to the normal game state. For example, when time-saving game state A begins after the end of a winning game, the counter value is "0", and when time-saving game state A ends and transitions to the normal game state occurs, the counter value becomes "100". Then, when the counter value is determined to be "898 (time-saving game state 100 + normal game state 798)" in step S105-4-11-8 of the game state-specific processing described later, the processing is confirmed.

The play count counter for activating time-saving play state B may be set to count the number of plays in the normal play state only. In other words, when time-saving play state A ends and transitions to the normal play state occurs, the counter value is "0", and if the counter value is determined to be "798 (normal play state 798)" in step S105-4-11-8 of the game state-specific processing described below, the processing may be set to "yes".

The gate detection SW 20a is provided inside the passage opening of the gate member 20 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20. In other words, the gate detection SW 20a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when the passage of the game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) that inputs the detected information controls to immediately execute the normal pattern change game when the normal pattern reserve display 27f is not executing the normal pattern change game and when the judgment information (random number value) is not stored in any of the corresponding change memory area for normal patterns to the fourth memory area, for example, controls to reserve the execution of the normal pattern change game when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the third memory area, and controls not to reserve the execution of the normal pattern change game when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the fourth memory area.

The first start hole detection SW21a is provided inside the winning hole of the first start hole 21 of the game board 6, and is a switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the first start hole 21. In other words, the first start hole detection SW21a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a game ball has entered, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has input the detected information, then performs processing to have the payout control board 300 pay out three game balls as prize balls for the game ball having entered the first start hole 21.

In addition, when an input is made from the first start hole detection SW21a, if the pattern change game is not being executed on either the first special pattern display 27a or the second special pattern display 27b, and if no judgment information (random number value) is stored in any of the variable memory areas for the special pattern (first start hole) through the fourth memory area, the main control board 100 immediately controls to execute the pattern change game on the first special pattern display 27a, and if judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the third memory area, for example, the main control board 100 controls to suspend the execution of the pattern change game, and if judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the fourth memory area, the main control board 100 controls not to suspend the execution of the pattern change game.

The second start hole detection SW22a is provided inside the winning hole of the second start hole 22, and is a SW for detecting that a game ball has entered the second start hole 22. In other words, the second start hole detection SW22a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a game ball has entered, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has input the detected information, then performs processing to have the payout control board 300 pay out two game balls as prize balls for the game ball having entered the second start hole 22.

In addition, when an input is made from the second start hole detection SW22a, if the pattern change game is not being executed on either the first special pattern display 27a or the second special pattern display 27b, and if no judgment information (random number value) is stored in any of the variable memory areas for the special pattern (second start hole) through the fourth memory area, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) immediately controls to execute the pattern change game on the second special pattern display 27b, and if judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the third memory area, for example, it controls to suspend the execution of the pattern change game, and if judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the fourth memory area, it controls not to suspend the execution of the pattern change game.

The second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b is provided behind the second starting port 22, and is a solenoid for opening and closing the protruding member provided in the second starting port 22 described above. In other words, the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) drives and controls the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 22b to open and close in the opening/closing manner shown in "Opening/closing manner of the second starting port" in Figure 6 when a normal pattern winning is determined in the normal pattern winning determination process.

The normal winning hole detection SW23a is provided inside the winning hole of the normal winning hole 23 of the game board 6, and is a switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23. In other words, the normal winning hole detection SW23a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when a game ball has entered, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has input the detected information, then performs processing to have the payout control board 300 pay out eight game balls as prize balls for the game ball having entered the normal winning hole 23.

The large prize opening detection SW 24a is provided inside the prize opening of the large prize opening 24, and is a switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 24. In other words, the large prize opening detection SW 24a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when a game ball is detected entering, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Then, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) that inputs the detected information performs processing to have the payout control board 300 pay out 12 game balls as prize balls for the game ball entering the large prize opening 24. In addition, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) transmits a large prize opening entry command indicating that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 24 to the performance control board 200. As a result, the performance control board 200 can also recognize the ball entry status of the game ball into the large prize opening 24.

The large prize opening opening solenoid 24b is provided behind or to the side of the large prize opening 24, and is a solenoid for opening and closing the opening door provided in the large prize opening 24 described above. In other words, the large prize opening opening solenoid 24b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness or relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) drives and controls the large prize opening opening solenoid 24b to open and close the opening door for the number of awarded rounds shown in FIG. 6 during a winning game.

The out detection SW 25a is provided inside the entrance of the out port 25, and is a switch for detecting when a game ball enters the out port 25. In other words, the out detection SW 25a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a game ball entering the ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to grasp the number of outs.

The first special symbol display 27a is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display controlled by the main control board 100 to execute a symbol change game based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 21. In other words, the first special symbol display 27a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the display of the symbol change game on the first special symbol display 27a when the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the first special symbol display 27a are met. Note that the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the first special symbol display 27a are met when a positive judgment is made in the processing of step S105-2-4 in the "special symbol change start processing" (see FIG. 19) described below.

The second special symbol display 27b is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is a display for executing a symbol change game based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 22. In other words, the second special symbol display 27b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the display of the symbol change game on the second special symbol display 27b when the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the second special symbol display 27b are met. Note that the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the second special symbol display 27b are met when a positive judgment is made in the processing of step S105-2-1 in the "special symbol change start processing" (see FIG. 19).

The first special symbol reserved indicator 27c is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of reserved symbols in the symbol change game based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21. In other words, the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when the main control board 100 inputs information that a game ball has been detected from the first starting hole detection SW21a, it controls the display of the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c (from off to on, or from on to blinking) if the upper limit of reserved symbols (4) has not been reached. On the other hand, when the symbol change game based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21 that is currently changing ends, it controls the display of the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c (from blinking to on, or from on to off).

The second special symbol reserved indicator 27d is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of reserved symbols in the symbol change game based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 22. In other words, the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when the main control board 100 inputs information that a game ball has been detected from the second starting hole detection SW 22a, it controls the display of the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d (from off to on, or from on to blinking) if the upper limit of reserved symbols (4) has not been reached. On the other hand, when the symbol change game based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 22 that is currently changing ends, it controls the display of the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d (from blinking to on, or from on to off).

The normal symbol display 27e is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display for executing a normal symbol variation game whose display is controlled by the main control board 100. In other words, the normal symbol display 27e and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the display of the normal symbol variation game on the normal symbol display 27e when the execution conditions for the normal symbol variation game on the normal symbol display 27e are met.

The normal symbol reserved indicator 27f is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of reserved normal symbol variation games based on the passage of game balls through the gate member 20. In other words, the normal symbol reserved indicator 27f and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) inputs information that game balls have been detected from the gate detection SW 20a, it controls the display of the normal symbol reserved indicator 27f (from off to on, or from on to blinking) if the upper limit of reserved balls (4 balls) has not been reached. On the other hand, when the currently varying normal symbol variation game ends, it controls the display of the normal symbol reserved indicator 27f (from blinking to on, or from on to off).

The round indicator 27g is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is a display controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of times the large prize opening 24 is opened during the winning game described above. In other words, the round indicator 27g and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and, for example, when a symbol change game determined to be a winning game in the special symbol winning determination process ends and a special symbol indicating a winning game (e.g., "7") is displayed on the first special symbol display 27a, the round indicator 27g controls to light up the LED indicator of the number of rounds corresponding to the determined winning game. Then, when a winning game is being played, the round indicator 27g continues to be controlled to light up, and when the winning game ends, the round indicator 27g is controlled to light off.

The magnetic sensors 27h are provided at multiple locations on the game board 6, and are sensors for detecting magnetism. In other words, the magnetic sensors 27h and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and, for example, when an abnormal magnetic field exceeding a predetermined specified value is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to detect abnormal magnetic fields. Then, when an abnormal magnetic field is detected, information on the detection of the abnormal magnetic field is transmitted to the performance control board 200. This makes it possible to issue an alert that an abnormal magnetic field has been detected.

The radio wave sensors 27i are provided at multiple locations on the game board 6, and are sensors for detecting radio waves. In other words, the radio wave sensors 27i and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and, for example, when abnormal radio waves exceeding a predetermined specified value are detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to detect abnormal radio waves. Then, when abnormal radio waves are detected, information on the detection of the abnormal radio waves is transmitted to the performance control board 200. This makes it possible to issue an alert that abnormal radio waves have been detected.

The performance control board 200 is provided with a performance control unit 200a, which has a sub-CPU 201 that performs performance control processing, a sub-ROM 202 that stores the control programs required for the performance control processing, and a sub-RAM 203 that can read and write data required for the performance control processing. In addition, an image/sound control unit 200b is provided that is connected to the performance control unit 200a via a harness or the like so as to enable two-way communication, and the image/sound control unit 200b has an image/sound CPU 204 that performs image/sound control processing, a sound ROM 205 that stores sound data, a CG ROM 206 that stores image data, and a VRAM 207 equipped with a frame buffer that stores image generation data, etc. In addition, a light emission drive control unit 200c is provided that is connected to the performance control unit 200a via a harness or the like so that two-way communication is possible. The light emission drive control unit 200c has a light emission drive CPU 208 that performs light emission control processing and drive control processing, a light emission drive ROM 209 that stores the control programs required for the light emission control processing and drive control processing, and a light emission drive RAM 210 that can read and write the data required for the light emission control processing and drive control processing.

The performance control unit 200a is also connected so that operation information from the performance button detection SW14a, the performance lever detection SW15a, and the cross key detection SW16a can be input.

The effect button detection SW14a is provided on the effect button 14, and is a switch for detecting that the effect button 14 has been pressed by the player when the effect button 14 is in the effective operation period. In other words, the effect button detection SW14a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed is input to the effect control board 200. The effect control board 200, which has input thereto information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed, controls the effect corresponding to the pressing of the effect button 14 via the image display device 26 and the speaker 10. Here, for example, in a symbol change game, the effect button 14 has a valid operation period set for a predetermined time, and the effect button detection SW14a detects only pressings when the valid operation period is set.

The effect lever detection SW15a is provided on the effect lever 15, and is a SW for detecting that the effect lever 15 has been operated by the player when the effect lever 15 is in the effective operation period. In other words, the effect lever detection SW15a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated is input to the effect control board 200. The effect control board 200, which has input the information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated, controls the effect according to the operation of the effect lever 15 via the image display device 26 and speaker 10. Here, for example, in a symbol change game, the effect lever 15 has a valid operation period set for a predetermined time, and the effect lever detection SW15a detects only the operation when the valid operation period is set.

The cross key detection SW 16a is provided on the cross key button 16, and is a switch for detecting when the cross key button 16 is pressed by the player. In other words, the cross key detection SW 16a and the performance control board 200 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and information indicating that the cross key button 16 has been operated is input to the performance control board 200.

As described above, by operating the cross key button 16, the amount of light emitted from the light-emitting device 9, the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26, and the volume emitted from the speaker 10 can be adjusted. Specifically, pressing the up button on the cross key button 16 can increase the amount of light (in stages), pressing the down button on the cross key button 16 can decrease the amount of light (in stages), pressing the right button on the cross key button 16 can increase the volume (in stages), and pressing the left button on the cross key button 16 can decrease the volume (in stages).

The light intensity may be set in three stages, "strong", "medium" and "weak", or may be further subdivided into five stages. The volume may be set in three stages, "high", "medium" and "low", or may be further subdivided into five stages. The image display device 26 may display a level gauge image showing the degree of adjustment of the light intensity or volume, and the speaker 10 may emit an adjustment sound according to the stage. For example, when the degree of volume adjustment is configured in five stages, the adjustment sound corresponding to the minimum volume value level 1 may be "Do♪", the adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value level 2 may be "Re♪", the adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value level 3 may be "Mi♪", the adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value level 4 may be "Fa♪", and the adjustment sound corresponding to the maximum volume value level 5 may be "So♪". The adjustment sound may be output at a volume value according to the volume value level. For example, "Re♪" may be output at a larger volume value than "Do♪".

The level gauge image may be displayed in a manner that corresponds to the level of light or volume, or in a constant manner regardless of the level of light or volume. Specifically, a display manner that corresponds to the level of light or volume means, for example, displaying the size (display area) of a level gauge image indicating volume level 2, which has a higher volume value than volume level 1, larger than the size (display area) of a level gauge image indicating volume level 1. On the other hand, a constant display manner regardless of the level of light or volume means displaying the size (display area) of the level gauge image to be the same whether it is volume level 1 or volume level 2.

The adjustment sound corresponding to the volume level may be set to, for example, a "beep" sound at any level, with the volume value being different for each level. Specifically, it is envisioned that when the volume level is 1, a "beep" sound is emitted at a volume value corresponding to volume level 1, and when the volume level is 2, a "beep" sound is emitted at a volume value corresponding to volume level 2 (a volume value higher than volume level 1).

In this embodiment, the light intensity and sound volume adjustments can be performed when the pattern change game is not being played, but they may also be performed when the pattern change game is being played. In this case, it is preferable to adjust the above-mentioned level gauge image without displaying it and without emitting the adjustment sound, or to display it in a small size and output the adjustment sound at a low volume. This prevents the level gauge image and adjustment sound corresponding to the pattern change game from being obstructed by the level gauge image and adjustment sound.

It may also be possible to adjust the amount of light and the volume during a winning game. In this case, the display of the level gauge image and the output of the adjustment sound may be controlled in the same way as when the amount of light and the volume are adjusted when the pattern change game is not being played, or the display of the level gauge image and the output of the adjustment sound may be controlled in the same way as when the amount of light and the volume are adjusted when the pattern change game is being played.

The above-mentioned level gauge image is displayed on the image display device 26, but if a display device is provided in addition to the image display device 26, the image may be displayed on the other display device. This prevents the display content displayed on the image display device 26 from being obstructed by the display of the level gauge image.

When the light intensity is adjusted, the level gauge image may be displayed but the adjustment sound may not be output.

In addition, an image display device 26 is connected to the image/sound control unit 200b, and image information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b can be displayed. In addition, a speaker 10 is connected to the image/sound control unit 200b, and sound information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b can be output.

As explained in FIG. 1, the speaker 10 is capable of outputting music (BGM), voice, and sound effects. For example, if closed state information is not input from the frame open detection SW3a described below, it outputs an alarm sound (e.g., warning sound + voice) indicating that the inner frame 3 is open. In other words, the speaker 10 and the image/sound control unit 200b are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the above-mentioned sounds are output from the speaker 10 under the control of the image/sound control unit 200b.

The light-emitting device 9, the starting port light-emitting device 21a, and the board lighting device 29 are connected to the light-emitting drive control unit 200c, and light emission can be controlled by the light-emitting drive control unit 200c. The light-emitting drive control unit 200c is also connected to the board drive device 30, and the movable body 28 can be driven and controlled via the board drive device 30.

The movable body 28 is provided on the game board 6 and is capable of performing actions such as "dropping,""swinging," and "rotating." By performing these actions, the possibility of a winning game being awarded is indicated.
Furthermore, the movable body 28 has a light emitting portion (for example, a full-color LED) and is capable of emitting light in multiple colors.

Furthermore, when the movable body 28 receives a power-related subcommand, it performs an initial operation in front of the display area of the image display device 26 to check whether the above-mentioned operations such as "drop," "swing," and "rotation" are performed normally. This initial operation involves the movable body 28 moving to the front of the display area of the image display device 26, so the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see for a certain period of time due to the movable body 28. Note that even if the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see due to the initial operation, other components (e.g., the starting hole light-emitting device 21a, the first special pattern reserved indicator 27c, the second special pattern reserved indicator 27d, the board lighting device 29, etc.) do not become difficult to see due to the initial operation of the movable body 28.

In addition to these, although not shown in the figure, it also includes an interrupt controller circuit that issues an interrupt signal to the sub-CPU 201, a hardware random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, etc.

The payout control board 300 is equipped with a payout CPU 301 that performs the payout control process, a payout ROM 302 that stores the control program required for the payout control process, and a payout RAM 303 that can read and write the data required for the payout control process. In addition, a payout device 304 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and game balls are paid out into the upper tray 5a by controlling the payout device 304.

Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives information that game balls have been detected by the first start hole detection SW21a, the main control board 100 sends a payout command signal to the payout control board 300 to pay out three prize balls, and the payout control board 300 receives this signal and controls the payout device 304 to pay out three prize balls into the upper tray 5a. When the payout of the three prize balls is complete, the payout control board 300 sends a payout completion signal to the main control board 100, completing the payout of the game balls in response to the input of information that game balls have been detected by the first start hole detection SW21a.

The payout control board 300 is also connected to the launch handle 8 via a harness or the like, and when the player touches the above-mentioned handle touch sensor provided on the launch handle 8, information that the launch handle 8 is being held is input, and the amount of rotation of the launch handle 8 is input based on the amount of launch volume (not shown) provided on the launch handle 8.

The payout control board 300 is also connected to a launching device 305 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the launching device 305, game balls are launched into the game area 7. Specifically, when the payout control board 300 receives information from the player that the launching handle 8 is being held by the player and inputs the amount of rotation of the launching handle 8, it controls the launching device 305 with a launch strength according to the amount of rotation of the launching handle 8 to launch the game balls.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 300 is connected so as to receive an input signal from the ball lending button 12 shown in FIG. 1 via a ball lending unit or the like, and when the ball lending button 12 is operated by a player, the payout control board 300 controls the payout device 304 to pay out a number of game balls (e.g., 125 balls) corresponding to one operation of the ball lending button 12 into the upper tray 5a.

The frame open detection SW3a is provided in the middle frame 3, and can detect the "open" state when the glass frame 4 is open, when the glass frame 4 and the middle frame 3 are open, when the middle frame 3 is open, etc., and can detect the "closed" state when the glass frame 4 and the middle frame 3 are closed. In other words, the frame open detection SW3a and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness, a relay board, etc., and when in the above-mentioned "closed" state, the information of the closed state is input to the payout control board 300. On the other hand, when in the above-mentioned "open" state, the information of the closed state is not input to the payout control board 300, and the payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) can detect the above-mentioned "open" state by not being input. In addition, the payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) can transmit information detected as being in the "closed" state and information detected as being in the "open" state to the performance control board 200.

Between the upper tray 5a and the lower tray 5b, a passage is formed to guide the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 5a to the lower tray 5b, and a full tank detection SW 300a is provided in the passage. If the game balls guided to the lower tray 5b are stored without being discharged (outside the gaming machine), the game balls will stop in the passage, and when a certain amount of game balls are stopped, the full tank detection SW 300a turns ON. This makes it possible to detect that the lower tray 5b is also full of game balls. When the full tank detection SW 300a turns ON, the payout CPU 301 stops the payout device 304 from paying out game balls, and transmits information that the full tank detection SW 300a is ON to the performance control board 200. This makes it possible for the performance control board 200 to execute a notification that prompts the game balls stored in the lower tray 5b to be discharged.

The main control board 100, the performance control board 200, and the payout control board 300 are connected to the power supply board 400 via harnesses, etc., and as described above, it receives external power via a power plug (not shown) and supplies the supplied external power to the main control board 100, the performance control board 200, and the payout control board 300. Although not shown, the power supply board 400 is provided with a conversion circuit, etc. that converts external power (100 volts AC) to 24 volts DC.

Next, the special symbol hit determination table and the normal symbol hit determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 5. First, the special symbol hit determination tables of FIG. 5 (A-1) and (A-2) are stored in the main ROM 102. Here, in this embodiment, six levels of setting values can be set, and FIG. 5 (A-1) shows an example of a special symbol hit determination table for a setting value of 1, and FIG. 5 (A-2) shows an example of a special symbol hit determination table for a setting value of 6, with other setting values omitted. For example, when the setting value is set to 1, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol hit determination process by referring to the special symbol hit determination table for the setting value 1 shown in (A-1), and when the setting value is set to 6, the special symbol hit determination process by referring to the special symbol hit determination table for the setting value 6 shown in (A-2). In addition, the term "common to the first and second start holes" indicates that the special symbol winning determination table is common whether the game ball enters the first start hole 21 or the second start hole 22. The setting value is not limited to "6" levels, and can be any value. For example, it can be "4" levels or "2" levels.

In addition, the machine may not have a setting value and may only have the special symbol winning determination table of FIG. 5 (A-1) (may be a machine without a setting).
Also, although the setting value is provided, only the special symbol winning judgment table of FIG. 5 (A-1) may be provided. That is, there is no problem if only one setting value is provided, and the contents of the main control board main processing shown in FIG. 10 are the same as those of a gaming machine with multiple setting values. Even if only one setting value is provided, there is no problem if the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 11 and the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 12 are performed. In this way, the processing can be shared between a gaming machine with multiple setting values (a setting-equipped machine) and a gaming machine with only one setting value (effectively a setting-unequipped machine), so that the developer's labor can be reduced.
In addition, when the game machine has only one set value, there is no problem in using the same main control board 100 as in a game machine having multiple set values (the hardware may also be common). In this way, the components can be commonized, which reduces costs.

In the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 5 (A-1), when the game state is the normal game state and when the time-saving game state (A, B), the probability of being determined as a hit in the special symbol hit determination process is "1/319", and the probability of being determined as a miss is "318/319". When the game state is the probability-changing game state, the probability of being determined as a hit in the special symbol hit determination process is "1/32", and the probability of being determined as a miss is "31/32". In other words, when the game state is the probability-changing game state, the probability of being determined as a hit varies by about 10 times compared to the normal game state and the time-saving game state (A, B), so it can be said that the probability-changing game state is a game state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state and the time-saving game state (A, B).

In the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 5 (A-2), when the game state is the normal game state and when it is the time-saving game state (A, B), the probability of being determined as a hit in the special symbol hit determination process is "1/280", and the probability of being determined as a miss is "279/280". When the game state is the probability-changing game state, the probability of being determined as a hit in the special symbol hit determination process is "1/28", and the probability of being determined as a miss is "27/28". In this way, by being able to set different hit probabilities for each setting value, it becomes easier for the gaming facility to manage the balls dispensed.

In addition, in the time-saving game state (A, B) and the probability-changing game state, as shown in FIG. 5(B) and FIG. 6(B), it is easier to hit a winning combination in the normal symbol hit determination process, and in the event of hitting a winning combination, an advantageous opening/closing mode is selected as the opening/closing mode of the protruding member of the second starting hole 22. Therefore, the probability-changing game state is the most advantageous game state for the player, followed by the time-saving game state (A, B), and the normal game state is the least advantageous game state for the player. Note that, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper limit for the time-saving game state A is 100 times, and the upper limit for the time-saving game state B is 1212 times, so the time-saving game state B is a more advantageous game state for the player than the time-saving game state A.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the gate member 20 is provided on the right side of the play area 7, but not on the left side of the play area 7. If a right-handed hit is made in the normal play state and the game ball passes through the gate member 20, as shown in FIG. 5, a normal win occurs at "4/256", so the protruding member of the second start hole 22 can be opened. However, since the opening time is "0.9S", it is difficult to get the game ball into the second start hole 22, and most of the shot game balls pass through the out hole 25. Therefore, in the normal play state, the optimal play for the player is to hit the game ball from the left and get the game ball to enter the first start hole 21. Therefore, when the gate detection SW 20a detects a game ball in the normal play state, a left-handed hit notification is made to encourage the player to play the game optimally.

In the following, the normal game state and the time-saving game state (A, B) may be collectively referred to as the low probability state, and the special probability game state may be collectively referred to as the high probability state. The normal game state may also be referred to as non-special probability state or non-special probability state, and the special probability game state and the time-saving game state (A, B) may also be collectively referred to as special probability state, special probability state, or improved winning rate state.

Next, the normal symbol hit determination table in FIG. 5(B) is stored in the main ROM 102. When the game state is the normal game state, the probability of being determined as a hit in the normal symbol hit determination process is "4/256", and the probability of being determined as a miss is "252/256". When the game state is the time-saving game state (A, B) and the probability of being determined as a chance game state, the probability of being determined as a hit in the normal symbol hit determination process is "251/256", and the probability of being determined as a miss is "5/256". Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving game state (A, B) and the probability of being determined as a chance game state are more likely to be determined as a hit in the normal symbol hit determination process than in the normal game state, and that these are advantageous game states for the player. Note that no set value is set in the normal symbol hit determination table (although the set value is common), but a set value may be set in the same way as in the special symbol hit determination table. For example, a setting value of "6" may make it easier to win in the normal symbol winning judgment compared to a setting value of "1." Also, in the normal game state, the probability of being judged as a win in the normal symbol winning judgment process is "4/256," and the probability of being judged as a loss is "252/256," but this is not limited thereto, and the probability of being judged as a loss may be "256/256."

Next, the special symbol determination table and the normal symbol determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 6. First, the special symbol determination table in FIG. 6(A) has two tables: (1) a table for the first starting hole 21, which is referred to when determining the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display 27a in the case of a hit or a miss as a result of the special symbol hit determination process performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21; and (2) a table for the second starting hole 22, which is referred to when determining the special symbol to be displayed on the second special symbol display 27b in the case of a hit or a miss as a result of the special symbol hit determination process performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 22. These tables are stored in the main ROM 102. The main CPU 101 refers to the table corresponding to the starting hole into which the game ball entered and determines the special symbol based on the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In the special symbol determination table of FIG. 6(A) (1), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, the main CPU 101 determines one of the special symbols from "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol C". Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, a random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and one of the special symbols is determined by referring to the obtained random number for determining the special symbol. For example, if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "0-9", "special symbol A" is determined, if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "10-64", "special symbol B" is determined, and if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "65-99", "special symbol C" is determined. Then, when the special symbol is determined, the "number of awarded rounds" and the "game state after the hit" are determined univocally. If "special symbol A" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of awarded rounds", and a special probability game state is awarded as the "game state after winning". If "special symbol B" is determined, 5 rounds are awarded as the "number of awarded rounds", and a special probability game state is awarded as the "game state after winning". If "special symbol C" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of awarded rounds", and time-saving game state A is awarded as the "game state after winning". On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol D", and since the "number of awarded rounds" and the "game state after winning" are not defined for "special symbol D", a winning game is not awarded.

In the special symbol determination table of FIG. 6(A)(2), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, the main CPU 101 determines one of the special symbols from "special symbol E" and "special symbol F". The specific determination method is the same as that of FIG. 6(A)(1) above, so the description is omitted. For example, if the acquired random number for determining the special symbol is "0 to 64", "special symbol E" is determined, and if the acquired random number for determining the special symbol is "65 to 99", "special symbol F" is determined. If "special symbol E" is determined, 10 rounds are granted as the "number of awarded rounds", and a special game state is granted as the "game state after winning". If "special symbol F" is determined, 10 rounds are granted as the "number of awarded rounds", and a time-saving game state A is granted as the "game state after winning". On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol G".

In this way, the probability of being awarded the special game state is "65%" for the first start port 21 and "65%" for the second start port 22, so there is no difference in the rate of entry into the special game state between the first start port 21 and the second start port 22. On the other hand, the "number of awarded rounds" is always 10 rounds for the second start port 22, and 5 rounds are never awarded, so it can be said that it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded a winning game based on a ball entering the second start port 22 than to be awarded a winning game based on a ball entering the first start port 21. In this embodiment, no set value is set in the special symbol determination table, but a set value may be set. For example, the determination rate of the special symbol may be different when the set value is "1" and when the set value is "6". In that case, the rate of entry into the special game state is common to all set values, but the "number of awarded rounds" may be set to a different rate for each set value. For example, the higher the set value is, the more likely it is that a more advantageous number of rounds will be awarded, or the higher the set value is, the more likely it is that a more advantageous number of rounds will be awarded.

In this way, since it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded a winning game based on a ball entering the second starting hole 22 than a winning game based on a ball entering the first starting hole 21, in a time-saving game state (A, B) or a guaranteed variable game state in which the second starting hole 22 can be opened in "1.8S x 3 times", the optimal game for the player is to hit from the right and have the game ball enter the second starting hole 22. For this reason, when the first starting hole detection SW 21a detects a game ball in the time-saving game state (A, B) or a guaranteed variable game state, a right-hit notification is issued to encourage the player to play the optimal game.

Next, the normal symbol determination table in Figure 6 (B) is stored in the main ROM 102, and is a table that is referenced when determining the normal symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the normal symbol display 27e when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process based on the game ball passing through the gate member 20 is a normal hit or a normal miss. When the game state is the normal game state, and the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal hit, the main CPU 101 determines "normal symbol A" in the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol-related process, and determines "normal symbol B" when the result is a normal miss. In addition, when the game state is the time-saving game state (A, B) or the probability variation game state, the main CPU 101 performs the normal symbol winning determination process. If the result is a normal winning symbol, the main CPU 101 determines "normal symbol C" in the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol-related process, and if the result is a normal losing symbol, the main CPU 101 determines "normal symbol D".

In addition, for normal symbols, the content to be awarded is uniquely determined, just like the special symbols described above. When "normal symbol A" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 opens "1" time in "0.9S", and when "normal symbol B" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 does not open. Also, when "normal symbol C" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 opens "3" times in "1.8S", and when "normal symbol D" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 does not open. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving game state (A, B) or the probability game state is more advantageous for the player when a normal symbol is hit, because the opening and closing mode of the protruding member of the second starting hole 22 is more advantageous than in the normal game state.

Although no set value is provided in the normal symbol determination table, a set value may be provided in the same way as in the special symbol determination table. For example, the probability of being determined to be a normal hit in the normal symbol hit determination process may be different for each set value, and a set value of "6" may be easier to hit than a set value of "1", or vice versa. Also, the opening and closing manner of the second starting hole 22 may be different for each set value. For example, a set value of "6" may open and close in a more favorable manner than a set value of "1", or vice versa.

In FIG. 6, if the number of awarded rounds is "10", the large prize opening 24 will be open for "29.5 seconds" per round, and this will be repeated 10 times. If the number of awarded rounds is "5", the large prize opening 24 will be open for "29.5 seconds" per round, and this will be repeated 5 times.

Next, the game state transition (game flow) in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7. As described above, this embodiment has a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a special game state. Strictly speaking, the time-saving game state is divided into a time-saving game state A and a time-saving game state B.

The normal game state is a low probability state managed by the main control board, and there is no normal power support. Normal power support means that it is easier to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol hit determination process, and when a hit occurs, the opening and closing pattern of the second starting hole shown in Figure 6 becomes "1.8S x 3 times." In addition, the presentation control board can execute presentation modes A to E as presentation modes (also called presentation stages).

The time-saving game state A is a low probability state managed by the main control board, and normal power support is available. The time-saving game state A has an upper limit of 100 times. In other words, one of the termination conditions is that 100 pattern change games have been played, and normal power support is available while 100 pattern change games are being played. In addition, the presentation control board can execute presentation mode F as a presentation mode.
In addition, since the time-saving gaming state A transitions according to a and d in Figure 8, it can be said to be a time-saving gaming state which transitions based on the result of the determination of the special pattern winning determination process.

The time-saving game state B is a low probability state managed by the main control board, and normal power support is available. The upper limit number of times for the time-saving game state B is 1212 times. In other words, one of the end conditions is that 1212 pattern change games have been played, and while 1212 pattern change games are being played, normal power support is available. In addition, the presentation control board can execute presentation mode G as a presentation mode.
In addition, even in the time-saving play state B, the presentation mode F, which is the presentation mode in the time-saving play state A, may be executed.
In addition, since the time-saving game state B is transitioned to by g in Figure 8, it can be said to be a time-saving game state which is transitioned to based on the number of variable displays satisfying a predetermined number after a predetermined condition is met.

The probability of a game being played in a special probability state is a high probability state managed by the main control board, and normal power support is available. The probability of a game being played in a special probability state has a maximum number of times set to 10,000. In other words, one of the conditions for ending the game is that 10,000 pattern change games have been played, and while 10,000 pattern change games have been played, normal power support is available. In addition, the presentation control board can execute presentation mode H as a presentation mode.

The winning game is managed by the main control board in a low probability state, and there is no regular power support.

In the time-saving gaming state A, the upper limit number of times is set to 100 times, but it may be set to less than 100 times or more than 100 times.
In addition, in the time-saving game state B, the upper limit number of times is set to 1212 times, but it may be any number as long as it is 3.8 times or less the denominator of the winning probability (e.g., 319) in the special pattern winning determination table shown in Figure 5.

In addition, a time-saving game state C may be provided in addition to the time-saving game states A and B described above, or instead of the time-saving game states A and B described above. This time-saving game state C is a time-saving game state that can be transitioned to in some cases where a special symbol hit determination process in a normal game state does not determine a hit. For example, the transition may be made at about 1/500. The combination of the time-saving game states A, B, and C may be any combination. For example, the time-saving game states A and B may be provided and the time-saving game state C may not be provided, or the time-saving game states A and C may be provided and the time-saving game state B may not be provided, or the time-saving game states B and C may be provided and the time-saving game state A may not be provided, or all of the time-saving game states A, B, and C may be provided.
In addition, the time-saving game state C belongs to the time-saving game state to which a transition is made based on the result of the special symbol winning determination process.

In addition, while an upper limit is set for the number of times that a game can be played in the probability variation game state, it is not necessary to set an upper limit. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, a so-called probability variation loop type game is used, but it may be a so-called ST type game or a falling lottery type game.

In addition, if the reel is of the ST type, it may have a special symbol (e.g., ST 100 times) that gives a high probability game state, and a special symbol (e.g., ST 100 times + time reduction 100 times) that gives a time-saving game state after the high probability game state and the end of the high probability game state.

Next, the transition of the game state will be described.
a: This is the transition when a win is determined in the special pattern win determination process.
b: This is the transition when any of the special patterns A, B, or E is determined.
c: This is the transition when a win is determined in the special pattern win determination process.
d: This is the transition when either the special pattern C or F is determined.
e: This is the transition when a win is determined in the special pattern win determination process.
f: This is the transition when 100 symbol variation games are played consecutively without winning.
g: This is the transition when 898 pattern change games are played consecutively without winning in the time-saving gaming state A and the normal gaming state.
h: This is the transition when the symbol change game is played 1212 times in succession without winning.
i: This is the transition when a win is determined in the special pattern win determination process.
j: This is the transition when the symbol variation game is played 10,000 times in succession without winning.

In g, the number of times is set to 898, but the number of times may be any number between 2.5 and 3.0 times the denominator of the winning probability (e.g., 319) in the special pattern winning determination table shown in Figure 5.
Furthermore, the number of times in g is an immutable value that cannot be changed, but it may be possible to allow an arbitrary value to be set by the gaming facility's gaming staff.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern tables (A and B) will be described with reference to FIG.
The special symbol variation pattern tables (A and B) in FIG. 8 are stored in the main ROM 102, and are tables to be referred to when determining the variation time in the symbol variation game.

In the figure, the number of reserved balls indicates the value resulting from subtracting 1 from the number of balls at the start of the fluctuation. For example, the number of reserved balls "3" in fluctuation pattern 0 means that the fourth memory area in FIG. 9 has been stored, and as a result of subtracting 1 from the number of balls at the start of the fluctuation, the fourth memory area becomes empty, and if there is a miss, fluctuation pattern 0 is determined. In other words, when there are many reserved balls (in the case of a miss), it is easier to select shortened fluctuation (100% shortened fluctuation may be selected, or 90% shortened fluctuation and 10% normal fluctuation may be selected) than when there are few reserved balls, thereby improving the operation of the pachinko game machine 1.

When the game state is the normal game state, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 101 determines one of the fluctuation patterns from "Fluctuation Pattern 0" to "Fluctuation Pattern 5". Specifically, when the game ball enters the first start hole 21 or the second start hole 22, a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is obtained, and one of the fluctuation patterns is determined by referring to the obtained random number for determining the fluctuation pattern. Although not shown, when the game ball enters the first start hole 21 or the second start hole 22, a random number for reach determination is obtained, and if the reach determination random number corresponds to a random number for executing a reach, one of the fluctuation patterns is determined from "Fluctuation Pattern 2" to "Fluctuation Pattern 5", and if the reach determination random number does not correspond to a random number for executing a reach, "Fluctuation Pattern 0" or "Fluctuation Pattern 1" may be determined. On the other hand, when the game state is the normal game state and the special symbol winning determination process results in a winning, the main CPU 101 refers to the random number for determining the variation pattern and determines one of the variation patterns from "Variation Pattern 6" to "Variation Pattern 11."

Then, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the "performance content" and the "fluctuation time" (number of seconds S) are determined univocally. When "fluctuation pattern 0" is determined, "shortened fluctuation" is determined as the "performance content", and "fluctuation time" is determined as "3S". Here, "shortened fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation that does not result in a reach and stops the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c simultaneously. When "fluctuation pattern 1" is determined, "normal fluctuation" is determined as the "performance content", and "7S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". Here, "normal fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation that does not result in a reach and stops the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c in order. When "fluctuation pattern 2" is determined, "normal reach" is determined as the "performance content", and "15S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". Here, a "normal reach" refers to a reach that involves a reach but does not involve any particular development effects (for example, a momentary stop display indicating a miss, followed by a change in the middle decorative pattern image 26b). Since the selection rate for a hit is low and the selection rate for a miss is high, this reach is positioned as one with a low expectation of a hit.

Furthermore, when "variation pattern 3" is determined, "Super Reach" is determined as the "effect content" and "40S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, "Super Reach" refers to a reach that performs a development effect during the execution of a reach (normal reach) and develops to, for example, a live-action image displayed on the image display device 26, and is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of a hit than a "normal reach" because it is configured with a higher selection rate when it hits and a lower selection rate when it misses than a "normal reach".

When "variation pattern 4" is determined, "pseudo consecutive 2 normal reach" is determined as the "effect" and "variation time" is determined as "50S". Note that "pseudo consecutive" will be explained in detail later, but "pseudo consecutive 2 normal reach" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than "normal reach" alone and a lower expectation of winning than "super reach". When "variation pattern 5" is determined, "pseudo consecutive 3 super reach" is determined as the "effect" and "variation time" is determined as "70S". "Pseudo consecutive 3 super reach" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than "super reach" alone. Note that "variation pattern 6" to "variation pattern 9" differ from "variation pattern 2" to "variation pattern 5" only in whether they are a miss or a hit, and the effect and variation time are the same, so explanations will be omitted.

When "variation pattern 10" is determined, "pseudo consecutive 4 super reach" is determined as the "effect" and "variation time" is determined as "90S". Here, "pseudo consecutive 4 super reach" is a variation pattern that is selected only in the case of a win, so if "pseudo consecutive" is performed four times, a win is confirmed at that point. When "variation pattern 11" is determined, "full rotation reach" is determined as the "effect" and "variation time" is determined as "120S". Here, "full rotation reach" is a reach in which the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c are scrolled (varied display) in a state where they are aligned with "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", "666", "777", and "888", and finally "777" is displayed as the final confirmation, for example.

The selectable variation patterns in the case of a win may be determined by the special symbol that has been determined. For example, variation patterns 6 to 10 may be selectable regardless of whether special symbol A, special symbol B, or special symbol C has been determined, and variation pattern 11 may be selected only when special symbol A has been determined. Also, variation patterns 6 to 11 may be selectable regardless of whether special symbol A, special symbol B, or special symbol C has been determined.

When the game state is the time-saving game state (A, B) or the probability variable game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 101 determines one of the fluctuation patterns from "fluctuation pattern 12" to "fluctuation pattern 15". If "fluctuation pattern 12" is determined, "reduced fluctuation" is determined as the "presentation content" and "2S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". Here, when the game state is the time-saving game state (A, B) or the probability variable game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 3, this "reduced fluctuation" is more likely to be selected, so that the time-saving game state (A, B) or the probability variable game state can be consumed efficiently.

When "variation pattern 13" is determined, "reach teasing" is determined as the "performance content" and "10S" is determined as the "variation time". Here, "reach teasing" is a performance that teases whether or not a reach will be formed by, for example, temporarily displaying a "7" symbol as the left decorative pattern image 26a and teasing whether or not to temporarily display a 7 symbol as the right decorative pattern image 26c. As a result of "reach teasing", for example, if an 8 symbol is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, a reach will not be formed, but if a 7 symbol is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, a reach will be formed, and it will develop into a "variable short medium super reach" in "variation pattern 15" or "variation pattern 17" described later.

In addition, when "variation pattern 14" is determined, "super reach during time-shortened play" is determined as the "presentation content" and "30S" is determined as the "variation time." Here, the "super reach during time-shortened play" is a "super reach" that is exclusive to the time-shortened play state (A, B) and the sure-variation play state, and is different from the "super reach" that is performed in the normal play state.

When "variation pattern 15" is determined, "reach provocation -> variable short super reach" is determined as the "effect content" and "40S" is determined as the "fluctuating time". Explanations of "variation pattern 16" and "variation pattern 17" are omitted since the only difference between "variation pattern 14" and "variation pattern 15" is whether they are a miss or a hit, and the effect content and fluctuation time are the same. Note that "reach provocation -> variable short super reach" is positioned as a reach with a higher probability of winning than "variable short super reach", because the selection rate when it hits is higher than "variable short super reach" and the selection rate when it misses is lower than "variable short super reach".

In this embodiment, the special symbol change pattern table B is a table that is referenced in the first symbol change game in the time-saving game state B (the first change in the time-saving game state B). In other words, in the first symbol change game when moving from the normal game state to the time-saving game state B, "change pattern 18" or "change pattern 19" is determined by referring to the special symbol change pattern table B.

Specifically, "variation pattern 18" is "specific variation A (miss)" and is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss. Also, "variation pattern 19" is "specific variation B (win)" and is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win. The specific presentation modes when these variation patterns are determined are described in detail in Figures 53, 55, etc.

In addition, in Figure 8, the special pattern change pattern table B is a table that is referenced in the first pattern change game of the time-saving game state B (the first change in the time-saving game state B), but this is not limited to this, and it may also be referenced in the last pattern change game in the normal game state immediately before transitioning to the time-saving game state B.
Also, for example, if the number of reserved balls becomes "3" at the start of the 897th pattern change game, the shortened variation can be selected, but if the number of reserved balls becomes "3" at the start of the 898th pattern change game, the shortened variation may not be selected, and a different variation pattern may be determined even if the normal game state and the number of reserved balls are the same.

In this embodiment, the special symbol change pattern table C is a table that is referenced when executing a symbol change game that corresponds to the judgment information (hereinafter referred to as remaining special 2) stored in the reserved memory area of the second starting port when the time-saving game state (A, B) ends and the game transitions to the normal game state. In other words, even in the normal game state, when remaining special 2 is consumed, "change pattern 20" or "change pattern 21" is determined by referring to the special symbol change pattern table C.

Specifically, "variation pattern 20" is a "specific variation C (miss)" and is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss. Also, "variation pattern 21" is a "specific variation D (win)" and is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win.

In addition, the fluctuation time for both "Specific Change C (Miss)" and "Specific Change D (Win)" is 15S, and a reach is not executed while the pattern fluctuation game is being played. For example, even with "Specific Change D (Win)", a reach is not executed, and a win is notified. Also, with "Specific Change C (Miss)" and "Specific Change D (Win)", the jackpot prediction performance A, jackpot prediction performance B, and jackpot prediction performance C, which will be described later, are not executed.

In particular, if the player does not get a winning game and transitions to the normal game state after playing the time-saving game state B, the player will be very disappointed. In such a situation, for example, if "specific variation C (miss)" + jackpot prediction performance B described below is executed, the jackpot prediction performance that has high expectations for a winning game will be executed, but it will end up being a miss, which may further disappoint the player. Therefore, in such a situation, by deriving the judgment result of the special symbol hit judgment process without executing excessive reaches or jackpot prediction performances, it is possible to prevent the player from being further disappointed.

It is also possible to determine different special symbol variation patterns for the remaining special 2 when the time-saving game state A ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, and for the remaining special 2 when the time-saving game state B ends and the game transitions to the normal game state. Also, the time-saving game state A has fewer playable times than the time-saving game state B, and if the game transitions to the normal game state without winning in the time-saving game state A, the player's disappointment will not be as great as in the time-saving game state B. Therefore, the remaining special 2 when the time-saving game state A ends and the game transitions to the normal game state may be set to execute a reach or a jackpot advance notice performance.

The above-mentioned special symbol variation patterns are not limited to those shown in FIG. 8, and may further include a plurality of special symbol variation patterns.
Also, the special symbol variation pattern table to be referred to may be different depending on the setting value. For example, a special symbol variation pattern that is easy to select for each setting value may be provided, or a special symbol variation pattern that can only be selected with that setting value may be provided. This allows the player to guess (or understand) what the setting value is from the performance content of the executed special symbol variation pattern, which leads to increased interest in the game.

In addition, the special symbol variation pattern table referenced in the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B is the same, but it may be different. This can give the player the feeling that different game states are being played, even though they are in the same time-saving game state.

Next, the determination information storage area of the main RAM and the counter of the main RAM will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the judgment information storage area (reserved storage area) provided in the main RAM 103 and the counter of the main RAM. The main RAM 103 is provided with (A) a reserved storage area corresponding to a special symbol, and (B) a reserved storage area corresponding to a normal symbol. In the first start hole 21, judgment information (random number value) related to the special symbol can be stored in the "variable storage area", the "first storage area", the "second storage area", the "third storage area", and the "fourth storage area", judgment information (random number value) related to the special symbol can be stored in the "variable storage area", the "first storage area", the "second storage area", the "third storage area", and the "fourth storage area", judgment information (random number value) related to the normal symbol can be stored in the "variable storage area", the "first storage area", the "second storage area", the "third storage area", and the "fourth storage area". The counter of the main RAM is as described above, so the explanation here is omitted.

Next, we will explain the control processing performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100.

(Regarding the main control board main processing)
10 is a flowchart showing main processing performed in the main control board 100. This processing is started by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and voltage is supplied from the power supply board 400 to each control board.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 101 judges whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage state. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage state, the process of step S1 is repeated, and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not in a power outage state, the process proceeds to step S2. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage state, the process can be executed using a backup power source (not shown).

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 101 prohibits interrupts (main control board timer interrupt processing). As a result, the main CPU 101 executes only the processing in Fig. 10 until an interrupt is permitted in S19 described later. Then, when the interrupt is prohibited, the processing proceeds to step S3.

After completing the processing of step S2, a signal to stop firing may be output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from being fired while the interrupt is prohibited. Then, in the first main control board timer interrupt processing after the interrupt is permitted in step S19 described below, the firing permission signal may be set to an allowed state.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 101 judges whether the RAM clear switch 105 is ON (whether it is pressed down). That is, it judges whether the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ON (the power supply SW 400a is ON) with the RAM clear switch 105 pressed down. If the RAM clear switch 105 is ON, the process proceeds to step S4, and if the RAM clear switch 105 is not ON, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 101 judges whether the setting change key is in the setting change position. For example, if it detects that the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and that the setting change key has been rotated 90 degrees, it judges that the setting change key is in the setting change position, and if it does not detect this, it judges that the setting change key is not in the setting change position. If the result is that the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S5, and if the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S7.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 101 performs a set value change process shown in Fig. 11. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 11. Then, when the set value change process ends, the process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. The power-on command is a command indicating that the RAM clear switch 105 is ON and power is turned on. When the performance control board 200 receives this command, it displays "Power on" on the image display device 26 via the image/sound control unit 200b, and outputs the sound "Power on" from the speaker 10. Then, when the power-on command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S18.

(Step S7)
In step S7, if the RAM clear switch 105 is ON and the power switch 400a is ON, the main CPU 101 initializes areas 1 and 2 (excluding the setting value storage area) of the main RAM 103. This allows, for example, if the time-saving game state (A or B) is in effect when the gaming establishment closes, the game to be restarted in the normal game state when the gaming establishment opens the next day. In this process, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is also cleared (counter value is set to 0). Then, after initializing areas 1 and 2 (excluding the setting value storage area) of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. After transmitting the power-on command, the process proceeds to step S18.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is in the setting change position. If the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S10. If the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value confirmation process shown in Fig. 12. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 12. Then, when the setting value confirmation process ends, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is backed-up data. For example, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, a backup process (not shown) is performed to hold data, store a checksum, and turn on a backup flag. If the backup flag is on, it is determined that there is backed-up data, and if the backup flag is not on, it is determined that there is no backed-up data. If there is backed-up data, the process proceeds to step S12, and if there is no backed-up data, it is determined that this is the first power-on and the process proceeds to step S18.

(Step S12)
In step S12, main CPU 101 calculates a checksum of an area of main RAM 103. Then, after calculating the checksum of the area of main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S13.

(Step S13)
In step S13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the checksum of the area of the main RAM 103 is normal. For example, it determines whether the checksum value stored in a backup process (not shown) matches the checksum value calculated in step S12, and if they match, it determines that the checksum is normal, and if they do not match, it determines that the checksum is abnormal. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S15, and if the checksum is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S14.

(Step S14)
In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs a game stop process (error setting). Specifically, it transmits an error command to the performance control board 200 to notify an error using the light emitting device 9, the speaker 10, the image display device 26, etc., and performs a process that makes it impossible to release the error unless the setting value change process of Fig. 11 is performed. Then, it remains in that process unless the setting value change process of Fig. 11 is performed.

(Step S15)
In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs a recovery process. That is, the state before the power outage is restored to normal. For example, if the game establishment closes the previous day with the number of plays counter for activating the time-saving game state B at "100," the game establishment will inherit the number of plays counter for activating the time-saving game state B at "100" when it opens the next day. Then, once the game establishment has returned to normal before the power outage, the process proceeds to step S16.

(Step S16)
In step S16, the main CPU 101 transmits a power restoration command. The power restoration command is a command indicating that the RAM clear switch 105 is OFF and power has been restored. When the performance control board 200 receives this command, it displays, for example, "power restoration in progress" on the image display device 26 via the image/sound control unit 200b, and outputs the sound "power restoration in progress" from the speaker 10. Then, after transmitting the power restoration command, the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S17)
In step S17, the main CPU 101 transmits a recovery time game counter command. The recovery time game counter command is a command indicating the value of each game counter (see FIG. 9) stored in the main RAM 103, and when the performance control board 200 receives the command, it notifies the number of games until the time-saving game state B is activated via the image/sound control unit 200b, or suggests whether the value of each game counter (see FIG. 9) stored in the main RAM 103 has been cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 105 via the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when the recovery time game counter command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S18.

(Step S18)
In step S18, the main CPU 101 sets the CTC. That is, it sets the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) that has functions such as generating a pulse output at a constant period and measuring time, and sets the time constant register of the CTC so that the main control board timer interrupt process described below is performed periodically every 4 ms. Then, after setting the CTC, the process proceeds to step S19.

(Step S19)
In step S19, the main CPU 101 permits the interruption. Then, when the interruption is permitted, the main control board timer interruption process (described later) is performed every 4 ms.

(Regarding setting value change processing)
Fig. 11 is a flow chart showing the setting value change process (a subroutine of step S5 of the main control board main process) performed in the main control board 100. The state in which the process of Fig. 11 is being performed corresponds to the above-mentioned "setting change state".

(Step S5-1)
In step S5-1, the main CPU 101 initializes the areas of the main RAM 103 (excluding the setting value storage area). In this process, each game number counter shown in Fig. 9 is also cleared (counter value is set to 0). Then, after initializing the areas of the main RAM 103 (excluding the setting value storage area), the process proceeds to step S5-2.

In step S5-1, each play count counter shown in FIG. 9 is also cleared (counter value is set to 0), but for example, when the setting change key is in setting change position A, each play count counter is also cleared, but when the setting change key is in setting change position B, each play count counter may not be cleared. This meets the needs of those who wish to change the setting value but do not wish to clear each play count counter.

(Step S5-2)
In step S5-2, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value changing command. The setting value changing command is a command indicating that a setting value change process is being performed, and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it causes, for example, the image display device 26 to display "setting changing" via the image/sound control unit 200b, and causes the speaker 10 to output a sound saying "setting changing." Then, when the setting value changing command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S5-3.

(Step S5-3)
In step S5-3, main CPU 101 reads out the current setting value and displays it on display 104. For example, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of main RAM 103 is "1", "1" is displayed on display 104. Then, after reading out the current setting value and displaying it on display 104, processing proceeds to step S5-4.

(Step S5-4)
In step S5-4, main CPU 101 determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, main CPU 101 determines whether RAM clear switch 105 has been turned ON. If RAM clear switch 105 has been turned ON, processing proceeds to step S5-5. If RAM clear switch 105 has not been turned ON, processing proceeds to step S5-7.

(Step S5-5)
In step S5-5, the main CPU 101 performs a process of changing the set value. For example, when the set value is "1" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "2", when the set value is "2" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "3", when the set value is "3" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "4", when the set value is "4" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "5", when the set value is "5" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "6", and when the set value is "6" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "1". After changing the set value, the process proceeds to step S5-6.

(Step S5-6)
In step S5-6, the main CPU 101 displays the changed set value on the display 104 (for example, the rightmost segment). For example, when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "1" is displayed, the set value "2" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "2" is displayed, the set value "3" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "3" is displayed, the set value "4" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "4" is displayed, the set value "5" is displayed; when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "5" is displayed, the set value "6" is displayed; and when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the set value "6" is displayed, the set value "1" is displayed. Then, when the changed set value is displayed on the display 104, the process proceeds to step S5-7.

(Step S5-7)
In step S5-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting change key is in a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (horizontal direction) to a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertical direction). If a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S5-8, and if a setting value confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S5-4.

(Step S5-8)
In step S5-8, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value in a setting value storage area of the main RAM 103. That is, when the desired setting value is displayed on the display 104, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is confirmed by rotating the setting change key 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertical direction). Thereby, subsequent games are played based on the stored setting value. Then, once the setting value has been stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S5-9.

(Step S5-9)
In step S5-9, the main CPU 101 turns off the display 104. That is, it turns off the setting value that was displayed on the display 104 in step S5-6. After turning off the display 104, the process proceeds to step S5-10.

(Step S5-10)
In step S5-10, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value information command. The setting value information command is a command that indicates information on a setting value, and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it stores the setting value information in the sub-RAM 203, and refers to the setting value information stored in the sub-RAM 203 when executing the setting value suggestion performance described below. Also, when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it ends the notification such as "settings are being changed" described above. Then, when the setting value information command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S6 of the main control board main process.

As described above, even when there is one set value, the set value change process may be performed. In step S5-5, for example, the set value may be changed from "1" to "1". In step S5-6, for example, when the set value "1" is displayed, if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value "1" may be displayed. In step S5-8, the set value "1" is already stored, but it may be updated and stored.

(Regarding setting value confirmation processing)
Fig. 12 is a flow chart showing the setting value confirmation process (a subroutine of step S10 of the main control board main process) performed in the main control board 100. The state in which the process of Fig. 12 is being performed corresponds to the above-mentioned "setting confirmation state".

(Step S10-1)
In step S10-1, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value checking command. The setting value checking command is a command indicating that a setting value checking process is being performed, and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it causes, for example, the image display device 26 to display "setting checking in progress" via the image/sound control unit 200b, and causes the speaker 10 to output a sound saying "setting checking in progress." Then, when the setting value checking command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S10-2.

(Step S10-2)
In step S10-2, main CPU 101 reads out the current setting value and displays it on display 104. For example, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of main RAM 103 is "1", "1" is displayed on display 104. Then, after reading out the current setting value and displaying it on display 104, processing proceeds to step S10-3.

(Step S10-3)
In step S10-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether an end operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting change key is in a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertical direction) from a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (horizontal direction). If an end operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S10-4, and if an end operation has not been performed, the process loops until an end operation is performed.

(Step S10-4)
In step S10-4, main CPU 101 turns off display 104. That is, it turns off display of the setting value displayed on display 104 in step S10-2. Then, after turning off display 104, the process proceeds to step S10-5.

(Step S10-5)
In step S10-5, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value check end command. The setting value check end command is a command indicating that the setting value check process has ended, and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it ends the notification such as "Settings are being checked" described above. Then, when the setting value check end command is transmitted, the process proceeds to step S11 of the main control board main process.

As mentioned above, the setting value confirmation process may be performed even when the device has a single setting value. Also, if the device does not have any setting values and is considered to be a device without settings, the processes in Figures 11 and 12 may be omitted.

(Main control board timer interrupt processing)
13 is a flowchart showing main control board timer interrupt processing performed in the main control board 100. This processing is executed by periodically (for example, every 4 ms) interrupting the above-mentioned main control board main processing.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 101 saves information stored in a register. After saving the information stored in the register, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs a time management process to update a timer used in the game (for example, the opening time of the special prize opening 24, etc.). Then, after updating the timer used in the game, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random numbers such as the random numbers for determining a win, the random numbers for determining a special symbol, the random numbers for determining a variation pattern, etc. Then, when the various random number update processes are completed, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 101 detects input from each switch shown in Fig. 4. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 14. Then, when an input from each switch is detected, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs a process related to the special symbols. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 18. Then, when the process related to the special symbols is completed, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to the normal symbol. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20, the main CPU 101 performs "normal symbol hit determination processing" to determine the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation time. Then, when the processing related to the normal symbol is completed, the processing proceeds to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to the payout of game balls. For example, when the entry of a game ball is detected in the input SW detection processing in step S104, a payout command signal is set in a payout command transmission area in order to send a payout command signal to the payout control board 300 to pay out the corresponding prize ball, and a payout completion signal is received from the payout control board 300. Then, when the processing related to the payout of game balls is completed, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs an abnormality determination process. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 23. Then, when the abnormality determination process ends, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting various commands to the performance control board 200. For example, in this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether a command has been set in a command transmission area provided in the main control board 100, and if a command has been set, transmits the set command to the performance control board 200 or the payout control board 300. Then, when the command transmission process is completed, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 101 performs display control (variable display and fixed display) of special symbols on the first special symbol display 27a in the case of a symbol change game based on a game ball entering the first start hole 21, and performs display control (variable display and fixed display) of special symbols on the second special symbol display 27b in the case of a symbol change game based on a game ball entering the second start hole 22. In addition, based on the game ball entering each start hole and the symbol change game at each start hole being completed, the main CPU 101 also performs display control of the first special symbol reserved display 27c and the second special symbol reserved display 27d. Then, when the display control of the special symbols is completed, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 101 controls the display of the normal symbol (variable display and fixed display) on the normal symbol display 27e. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20 and the fact that the normal symbol variable game has ended, the main CPU 101 also controls the display of the normal symbol reserved display 27f. Then, when the display control of the normal symbol is ended, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs a game performance information management process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 calculates game performance information using the above-mentioned formula of "(number of paid-out game balls in normal game state ÷ number of outs in normal game state) × 100" and performs a process of displaying the calculated game performance information on the display 104. Then, when the game performance information management process ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 101 restores the information saved in step S101 to the register. After restoring the saved information to the register, the main control board timer interrupt process ends.

(Input SW detection process)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the input SW detection processing performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S104-1)
In step S104-1, the main CPU 101 performs a process when the first start hole is detected. This process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 15. Then, when the process when the first start hole is detected is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-2.

(Step S104-2)
In step S104-2, the main CPU 101 performs a process when the second start hole is detected. This process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 16. Then, when the process when the second start hole is detected is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-3.

(Step S104-3)
In step S104-3, when the main CPU 101 receives information that a game ball has been detected from the normal winning hole detection SW 23a, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set a payout command signal in a payout command transmission area in order to have the payout control board 300 pay out 8 game balls as prize balls. Also, as described above, when a game ball enters the normal winning hole 23 in a winning game, a normal winning hole ball entry detection signal is set in the command transmission area in order to notify the ball entry using the speaker 10 and the image display device 26. Then, when the normal winning hole detection processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S104-4.

(Step S104-4)
In step S104-4, when the main CPU 101 receives information indicating that a game ball has entered the large prize opening detection SW 24a, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set a payout command signal in a payout command transmission area in order to have the payout control board 300 pay out 12 game balls as prize balls. In addition, a large prize opening ball entry detection signal is set in the command transmission area in order to notify the fact that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 24 using the image display device 26 or the like. An example of a notification using the image display device 26 or the like is, for example, when more than 10 game balls are detected by the large prize opening detection SW 24a per round (also called over entry), the notification is made by displaying the fact using the image display device 26 or by making a sound (for example, a "pirorin" sound) using the speaker 10. Then, when the large prize opening detection processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S104-5.
In addition, the notification of an over win is not limited to a sound from the speaker 10, but may also be made by the light-emitting device 9, or by displaying a specific character on the image display device 26, or by vibrating the effect button 14 or the effect lever 15 with a vibration device.

(Step S104-5)
In step S104-5, the main CPU 101 performs a pass gate detection process. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 17. Then, when the pass gate detection process ends, the process proceeds to step S104-6.

(Step S104-6)
In step S104-6, the main CPU 101 performs processing when it receives information that a game ball has entered the game ball detection switch 25a. For example, in order to transmit an out-port passing command to the performance control board 200, the main CPU 101 sets the out-port passing command in a command transmission area. Then, when the out-port detection processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Processing when the first starting port is detected)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control board 100 when the first starting hole is detected (a subroutine of step S104-1 of the input SW detection processing).

(Step S104-1-1)
In step S104-1-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the first start hole detection SW 21a has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the game hole. If the first start hole detection SW 21a has input information indicating that a game ball has entered the game hole, the process proceeds to step S104-1-2. If the first start hole detection SW 21a has not input information indicating that a game ball has entered the game hole, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-1-2)
In step S104-1-2, the main CPU 101 sets a prize ball command in the payout command transmission area to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out three game balls as prize balls for the game ball entering the first starting hole 21. Then, after setting the prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S104-1-3.

(Step S104-1-3)
In step S104-1-3, the main CPU 101 judges whether the above-mentioned "fourth memory area" has been stored. In other words, it judges whether the number of reserved symbol variation games in the first starting hole 21 is "4". If the "fourth memory area" has been stored, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process, and if the "fourth memory area" has not been stored, the process proceeds to step S104-1-4.

(Step S104-1-4)
In step S104-1-4, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for winning judgment. The random number value acquired in this process is used in the winning judgment process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) described later. After acquiring the random number value for winning judgment, the process proceeds to step S104-1-5.

The random number value for hit determination may be obtained prior to step S104-1-3. If it is determined in step S104-1-3 that the "fourth storage area" has been filled, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-5)
In step S104-1-5, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for determining a special symbol. The random number value acquired in this process is used in the winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) described later. After acquiring the random number value for determining a special symbol, the process proceeds to step S104-1-6.

The random number value for determining the special symbol may be obtained prior to step S104-1-3. If it is determined in step S104-1-3 that the "fourth storage area" has been filled, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-6)
In step S104-1-6, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern. The random number value acquired in this process will be used in the winning determination process (step S104-1-8) and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 19) described later. After acquiring the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern, the process proceeds to step S104-1-7.

The random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern may be obtained prior to step S104-1-3. If it is determined in step S104-1-3 that the "fourth memory area" has been filled, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-7)
In step S104-1-7, the main CPU 101 stores the random number values for determining a win, the random number values for determining a special symbol, and the random number values for determining a special symbol variation pattern in an available memory area as determination information. For example, if the "third memory area" is stored and the "fourth memory area" is empty, each random number value is stored in the "fourth memory area." Then, once each random number value has been stored in an available memory area, the process proceeds to step S104-1-8.

(Step S104-1-8)
In step S104-1-8, the main CPU 101 performs a winning time determination process. This winning time determination process is a process for determining whether the random number value acquired in step S104-1-4 is a winning number, prior to the special symbol winning time determination process in the special symbol variation start time process (see FIG. 19). As a result, for example, if the winning time determination random number value stored in the "fourth memory area" in step S104-1-7 is a winning number, a preview performance ("preview performance" described later) can be executed across multiple variations. Then, when the winning time determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-1-9.

(Step S104-1-9)
In step S104-1-9, the main CPU 101 sets the first start port winning command in the command transmission area in order to send the first start port winning command to the performance control board 200. The first start port winning command also includes information on the result of the winning time judgment process in step S104-1-8, and by receiving this command, the performance control board 200 can recognize whether the result of the winning time judgment process is a win or a miss. Then, after setting the first start port winning command, the process proceeds to step S104-1-10.

(Step S104-1-10)
In step S104-1-10, the main CPU 101 sets the reserved memory area designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the reserved memory area designation command to the performance control board 200. The reserved memory area designation command is a command that indicates the storage status of the judgment information storage area (reserved memory area) of the main RAM 103, and is a command that includes information such as "0" when only the variable memory area is stored, "1" when the first storage area is stored, "2" when the second storage area is stored, "3" when the third storage area is stored, and "4" when the fourth storage area is stored. This allows the performance control board 200 to recognize the storage status of the judgment information storage area (reserved memory area) of the main RAM 103. Then, when the reserved memory area designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-1-11.

(Step S104-1-11)
In step S104-1-11, the main CPU 101 judges whether the current game state is a time-saving game state (A, B) or a probability variable game state. Specifically, it judges whether "1" indicating the time-saving game state A, "2" indicating the probability variable game state, or "3" indicating the time-saving game state B is stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, if the current game state is the time-saving game state (A, B) or the probability variable game state, the process proceeds to step S104-1-12, and if the current game state is not the time-saving game state (A, B) or the probability variable game state, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-1-12)
In step S104-1-12, the main CPU 101 sets a left hit error designation command in the command transmission area in order to send the left hit error designation command to the performance control board 200. That is, when a left hit is performed in the time-saving game state (A, B) or the probability variation game state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, a notification of a left hit error (for example, a display and a voice notification such as "Please hit to the right") is made. Then, when the left hit error designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.
In addition, if the gate member 20 is also provided in the first game area 7a, the left hit error designation command is not set when the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, but rather when the game ball passes through the gate member 20.

(Regarding processing when the second starting port is detected)
16 is a flow chart showing the process at the time of detecting the second start port (a subroutine of step S104-2 of the input SW detection process) performed in the main control board 100. Note that since the basic process contents are the same as those in FIG. 15 except for the start port, the explanation will be omitted as appropriate.

(Step S104-2-1)
In step S104-2-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the information on the detection of the game ball entering has been input from the second start hole detection SW 22a. If the information on the detection of the game ball entering has been input from the second start hole detection SW 22a, the process proceeds to step S104-2-2. If the information on the detection of the game ball entering has not been input from the second start hole detection SW 22a, the process proceeds to step S104-3 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-2-2)
In step S104-2-2, the main CPU 101 sets a prize ball command in the payout command transmission area to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out two game balls as prize balls for the game ball entering the second starting hole 22. Then, after setting the prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S104-2-3.

(Step S104-2-3)
In step S104-2-3, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the above-mentioned "fourth memory area" has been stored. In other words, it judges whether or not the number of reserved symbol variation games in the second starting hole 22 is "4". If the "fourth memory area" has been stored, the process proceeds to step S104-3 of the input SW detection process, and if the "fourth memory area" has not been stored, the process proceeds to step S104-2-4.

(Step S104-2-4)
In step S104-2-4, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining whether or not a win has been determined. After obtaining the random number value for determining whether or not a win has been determined, the process proceeds to step S104-2-5.

(Step S104-2-5)
In step S104-2-5, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a special symbol. After obtaining the random number value for determining a special symbol, the process proceeds to step S104-2-6.

(Step S104-2-6)
In step S104-2-6, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern. After obtaining the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the process proceeds to step S104-2-7.

(Step S104-2-7)
In step S104-2-7, the main CPU 101 stores the random number value for determining the winning combination, the random number value for determining the special symbol combination, and the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern in an available memory area as determination information. After storing each random number value in an available memory area, the process proceeds to step S104-2-8.

(Step S104-2-8)
In step S104-2-8, the main CPU 101 performs a prize determination process. Then, when the prize determination process ends, the process proceeds to step S104-2-9.

(Step S104-2-9)
In step S104-2-9, the main CPU 101 sets the second start hole winning command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the second start hole winning command to the performance control board 200. Then, when the second start hole winning command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-2-10.

(Step S104-2-10)
In step S104-2-10, the main CPU 101 sets the reserved memory area designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the reserved memory area designation command to the performance control board 200. Then, when the reserved memory area designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-3 of the input SW detection process.

(Processing when passing gate is detected)
FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the pass gate detection process carried out in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S104-5 of the input SW detection process).

(Step S104-5-1)
In step S104-5-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not information on the detection of a game ball entering the game has been input from the gate detection SW 20a. If information on the detection of a game ball entering the game has been input from the gate detection SW 20a, the process proceeds to step S104-5-2, and if information on the detection of a game ball entering the game has not been input from the gate detection SW 20a, the process proceeds to step S104-6 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-5-2)
In step S104-5-2, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the above-mentioned "fourth storage area" has been stored. In other words, it judges whether or not the number of reserved normal symbol variation games is "4". If the "fourth storage area" has been stored, the process proceeds to step S104-6 of the input SW detection process, and if the "fourth storage area" has not been stored, the process proceeds to step S104-5-3.

(Step S104-5-3)
In step S104-5-3, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won. After obtaining the random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol has won, the process proceeds to step S104-5-4.

(Step S104-5-4)
In step S104-5-4, the main CPU 101 obtains a random number value for determining a normal symbol. Then, when the random number value for determining a normal symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to step S104-5-5.

The random number value for determining the normal symbol may be obtained prior to step S104-5-4. If it is determined in step S104-5-2 that the "fourth memory area" has been filled, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-5-5)
In step S104-5-5, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Then, when the random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern is acquired, the process proceeds to step S104-5-6.

(Step S104-5-6)
In step S104-5-6, the main CPU 101 stores the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol wins, the random number value for determining the normal symbol variation pattern, and the random number value for determining the normal symbol variation pattern in an available memory area as determination information. Then, after storing each random number value in an available memory area, the process proceeds to step S104-5-7.

(Step S104-5-7)
In step S104-5-7, the main CPU 101 sets the normal reserved increase command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the normal reserved increase command to the performance control board 200. Then, when the normal reserved increase command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-5-8.

(Step S104-5-8)
In step S104-5-8, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol reserved memory area designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the normal symbol reserved memory area designation command to the performance control board 200. Then, when the normal symbol reserved memory area designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-5-9.

(Step S104-5-9)
In step S104-5-9, the main CPU 101 judges whether the current game state is the normal game state. Specifically, it judges whether "0" indicating the normal game state is stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the current game state is the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S104-5-10, and if the current game state is not the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S104-6 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-5-10)
In step S104-5-10, the main CPU 101 sets a right-hit error designation command in the command transmission area in order to send the right-hit error designation command to the performance control board 200. That is, when a right-hit is performed in a normal game state and the game ball passes through the gate member 20, a notification of a right-hit error (for example, a display and audio notification such as "Please hit to the left") is made. Then, when the right-hit error designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-6 of the input SW detection process.

(Regarding special pattern related processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol-related processing performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S105-1)
In step S105-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a flag indicating a stopped state is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. For example, when the main CPU 101 starts the variation of the special symbol, it sets the value "1" indicating the variation in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S105-2-16 in FIG. 19 described later), and when it stops the variation of the special symbol, it sets the value "0" indicating the stopped state in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S105-4-3 in FIG. 20 described later). Note that after setting the value "0" indicating the stopped state, if there is a win, the value "2" indicating a winning game is set. Then, if the value "0" indicating the stopped state is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2, and if the value "0" indicating the stopped state is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-3.

(Step S105-2)
In step S105-2, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol variation start time process shown in Fig. 19. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 19. Then, when the special symbol variation start time process ends, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-3)
In step S105-3, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a flag indicating that the symbol is changing is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. If the value "1" indicating that the symbol is changing is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4, and if the value "1" indicating that the symbol is changing is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-5.

(Step S105-4)
In step S105-4, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol variation process shown in Fig. 20. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 20. Then, when the special symbol variation process ends, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5)
In step S105-5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value "0" indicating a stopped state is not set and that the value "1" indicating a fluctuating state is not set, it determines that the value "2" indicating a winning game is set and performs the winning game process shown in Fig. 22. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 22. Then, when the winning game process ends, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding the processing at the start of special symbol fluctuation)
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start processing carried out in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-2 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-2-1)
In step S105-2-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a reserved item in the reserved memory area of the symbol variation game corresponding to the second start hole 22 provided in the main RAM 103. If there is a reserved item corresponding to the second start hole 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-2, and if there is no reserved item corresponding to the second start hole 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-4.

(Step S105-2-2)
In step S105-2-2, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of reserved balls in the second start hole 22. As described above in the section "Regarding the second start hole 22," the subtraction corresponds to sliding the judgment information (random value) in the "variable memory area" to the "fourth memory area" and then emptying the memory area of "1." Accordingly, the display of the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d also changes to a display mode (from "blinking" to "lit," or from "lit" to "off") according to the number of reserved balls. Then, after subtracting "1" from the number of reserved balls in the second start hole 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-3.

(Step S105-2-3)
In step S105-2-3, the main CPU 101 sets a second start port subtraction command in the command transmission area in order to subtract the reserved number managed by the performance control board 200. Then, when the second start port subtraction command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-4)
In step S105-2-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a reservation in the reservation memory area corresponding to the first start port 21 provided in the main RAM 103. If there is a reservation corresponding to the first start port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-5, and if there is no reservation corresponding to the first start port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-7.

(Step S105-2-5)
In step S105-2-5, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of reserved balls in the first start hole 21. As described above in the section "Regarding the first start hole 21," the subtraction corresponds to sliding the judgment information (random value) in the "variable memory area" to the "fourth memory area" and then emptying the memory area of "1." Accordingly, the display of the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c also changes to a display mode (from "blinking" to "lit," or from "lit" to "off") according to the number of reserved balls. Then, after subtracting "1" from the number of reserved balls in the first start hole 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6.

(Step S105-2-6)
In step S105-2-6, the main CPU 101 sets a first start port subtraction command in the command transmission area in order to subtract the reserved number managed by the performance control board 200. Then, when the first start port subtraction command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-7)
In step S105-2-7, when there is neither a hold corresponding to the second start port 22 nor a hold corresponding to the first start port 21, the main CPU 101 sets a customer waiting command in the command transmission area to display a "Waiting for Customers" screen on the image display device 26. Then, when the customer waiting command is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

The "Waiting for Customers" screen refers to a state in which, for example, the sub-symbols confirmed and displayed in the most recently ended symbol-changing game, the background image displayed in the most recently ended symbol-changing game, the variable icon display area 26o, the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (which may also include the reserved ball image display area of the second start port), and images that notify the user that the volume or light intensity can be adjusted (for example, a level gauge image or an image that resembles a cross key button) are further added and displayed. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed in the "Waiting for Customers" state, a "demo performance" is executed. In addition, in the "demo performance", the sub-patterns and background images displayed in "Waiting for customers", as well as the variable icon display area 26o, the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (which may also include the reserved ball image display area of the second start port), the first start port reserved ball number image 26e, and the second start port reserved ball number image 26f are not displayed, and for example, the entire display area is used to display the model name, manufacturer name (manufacturer logo), and warning information to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed in the "demo performance", the "Waiting for customers" state will resume.

It is also possible not to send the customer waiting command. In this case, the performance control board 200 measures the time from the end of the previous symbol change game, and if a predetermined time is measured without receiving a new start command (such as a special symbol change pattern designation command), the "Waiting for customers" screen is displayed. In this way, the customer waiting command becomes unnecessary, which makes it possible to reduce commands and simplify control.

(Step S105-2-8)
In step S105-2-8, the main CPU 101 sets the reserved memory area designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the reserved memory area designation command to the performance control board 200. Then, when the reserved memory area designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-9.

(Step S105-2-9)
In step S105-2-9, if the main CPU 101 reaches this process after performing step S105-2-2, it uses the judgment information (random number value) acquired and stored in the second start hole detection process to judge whether the judgment information (random number value) is a winning judgment information (random number value). On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 reaches this process after performing step S105-2-5, it uses the judgment information (random number value) acquired and stored in the first start hole detection process to judge whether the judgment information (random number value) is a winning judgment information (random number value). Furthermore, the main CPU 101 determines a special pattern based on the result of the judgment. For example, if it is determined that the judgment information (random number value) acquired and stored in the first start hole detection process is a winning, it determines one of the special patterns A to C, and if it is determined that the judgment information (random number value) acquired and stored in the first start hole detection process is a losing, it determines the special pattern D. Then, when the special pattern winning judgment process is completed, the process is shifted to step S105-2-10.

(Step S105-2-10)
In step S105-2-10, the main CPU 101 sets the symbol designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the symbol designation command to the performance control board 200. For example, in step S105-2-9, if the special symbol D is determined, the main CPU 101 sets a symbol designation command indicating that it is the special symbol D. Then, when the symbol designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-11.

(Step S105-2-11)
In step S105-2-11, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbols in the symbol variation game (using the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 8). Then, when the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, the process proceeds to step S105-2-12.

As described above, if it is the first change in time-saving game state B, in step S105-2-11, the special symbol change pattern table B in FIG. 8 is used to determine the change pattern of the special symbol in the symbol change game. Also, as described above, if remaining special 2 is consumed, in step S105-2-11, the special symbol change pattern table C in FIG. 8 is used to determine the change pattern of the special symbol in the symbol change game. In other cases, the special symbol change pattern table A in FIG. 8 is used to determine the change pattern of the special symbol in the symbol change game.

(Step S105-2-12)
In step S105-2-12, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol variation pattern designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit a command indicating the special symbol variation pattern determined in step S105-2-11 to the performance control board 200. For example, if "variation pattern 9" is determined in step S105-2-11, a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating "variation pattern 9" is set. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-13.

(Step S105-2-13)
In step S105-2-13, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in step S105-2-11 in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. For example, if "fluctuation pattern 9" is determined, the fluctuation time "70S" is set. After the fluctuation time is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-14.

(Step S105-2-14)
In step S105-2-14, the main CPU 101 sets the value "1" indicating that the special symbol is changing in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the player to recognize that the special symbol is changing. In addition, in this process, the subtraction of the change time set in step S105-2-13 is started. Then, when the value "1" indicating that the special symbol is changing is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

In the explanation of Figure 19 above, if there is judgment information for the second starting hole 22 in step S105-2-1, the special pattern hit judgment process is executed in priority to the first starting hole 21, but the special pattern hit judgment process may be executed in the order in which the balls enter the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22.

(Regarding processing during special pattern changes)
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variable process carried out in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-4 of the special symbol related process).

(Step S105-4-1)
In step S105-4-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether the set variation time has elapsed in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. For example, when "variation pattern 9" is determined and "70S" is set, it judges whether "70S" has elapsed. Then, if the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-4-2, and if the variation time of the special symbol has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-2)
In step S105-4-2, the main CPU 101 sets a symbol stop command in the command transmission area in order to transmit a symbol stop command for stopping the sub-symbols variably displayed on the image display device 26 to the performance control board 200. Then, when the symbol stop command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-3.

(Step S105-4-3)
In step S105-4-3, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating that the special symbol is stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the main CPU 101 to recognize that the special symbol is stopped. Then, when the value "0" indicating that the special symbol is stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S105-4-4.

(Step S105-4-4)
In step S105-4-4, the main CPU 101 judges whether the result of the judgment in step S105-2-9 in Fig. 19 is a win or not. If it is a win, the process proceeds to step S105-4-5, and if it is not a win, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11.

(Step S105-4-5)
In step S105-4-5, the main CPU 101 sets the value "2" indicating a winning game in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the player to recognize that a winning game has occurred. In this process, the value "2" indicating a winning game is set, but the special symbol remains stopped until the winning game ends and the start condition for the next variation is met. Then, when the value "2" indicating a winning game is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S105-4-6.

(Step S105-4-6)
In step S105-4-6, the main CPU 101 clears the game state. For example, if the current game state is the normal game state, it is set to the normal game state, if the current game state is the time-saving game state (A, B), it is set to the normal game state, and if the current game state is the probability-changing game state, it is set to the normal game state. As a result, even if a hit is won in the time-saving game state (A, B), there is no normal power support during the winning game, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering losses because the game balls only enter the second start hole 22 during the winning game and the game balls do not enter the big prize hole 24. Then, when the game state is cleared, the process proceeds to step S105-4-7.

(Step S105-4-7)
In step S105-4-7, the main CPU 101 clears each game number counter. That is, when a winning game is won, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is cleared (counter value is set to 0) before the winning game starts. Then, after each game number counter is cleared, the process proceeds to step S105-4-8.

(Step S105-4-8)
In step S105-4-8, the main CPU 101 transitions to a winning opening that notifies the start of a winning game. For example, the winning state storage area of the main RAM 103 stores the state of the winning game, and if it is a winning opening, "0" is set, if the big prize opening 24 is open, "1" is set, if it is an interval between rounds, "2" is set, and if it is an ending, "3" is set. Then, after transitioning to the winning opening, the process transitions to step S105-4-9.

(Step S105-4-9)
In step S105-4-9, the main CPU 101 sets a winning opening command in the command transmission area in order to transmit a winning opening command for executing a presentation corresponding to the opening of a winning game to the presentation control board 200. Then, when the winning opening command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-10.

(Step S105-4-10)
In step S105-4-10, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the opening of the winning game (for example, "10S") in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. Then, when the time corresponding to the winning opening is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11)
In step S105-4-11, the main CPU 101 performs the game state specific processing shown in Fig. 21. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 21. Then, when the game state specific processing ends, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Processing by game state)
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the processing for each game state performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-4-11 of the processing during special symbol variation).

(Step S105-4-11-1)
In step S105-4-11-1, the main CPU 101 judges whether the current gaming state is the time-shortened gaming state A. Specifically, it judges whether "1" indicating the time-shortened gaming state A is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the current gaming state is the time-shortened gaming state A, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-2, and if the current gaming state is not the time-shortened gaming state A, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-8.

(Step S105-4-11-2)
In step S105-4-11-2, the main CPU 101 updates (increments) the time-saving game state B activation play counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the time-saving game state B activation play counter is incremented by "+1." Note that since the time-saving game state A has a playable number of times of 100, the time-saving game state B activation play counter will never reach "898" in the time-saving game state A. Therefore, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-3, where the time-saving game state play counter is updated (decremented).
In addition, the update can be performed in either a pattern change game based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 21 or a pattern change game based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 22.

The start of the time-saving gaming state A constitutes the establishment of a predetermined condition. That is, when the first symbol change game in the time-saving gaming state A is started, the value of the game number counter for activating the time-saving gaming state B becomes "1".
In addition, when the time-saving game state B is not won and the game state transitions to the normal game state, the value of the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B is not updated in the normal game state. In this case, the value of the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B is not updated until the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON and the area of the main RAM 103 is initialized, and when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON and the area of the main RAM 103 is initialized, the value of the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B can be updated.
In addition, when the time-saving gaming state A is not provided, the start of the normal gaming state constitutes the establishment of the predetermined condition. In other words, when the first symbol variation game in the normal gaming state is started, the value of the game number counter for activating the time-saving gaming state B becomes "1".

(Step S105-4-11-3)
In step S105-4-11-3, the main CPU 101 updates (subtracts) the time-saving game state play count counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the time-saving game state play count counter is set to "-1." Then, after updating (subtracting) the time-saving game state play count counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-4.

(Step S105-4-11-4)
In step S105-4-11-4, the main CPU 101 sets a game number counter command. Here, the game number counter command to be set is a command indicating the value of the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B and a command indicating the value of the time-saving game state game number counter. Then, after setting the game number counter command, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-5.

(Step S105-4-11-5)
In step S105-4-11-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the counter value after the subtraction, which was updated (decremented) in step S105-4-11-3, is 0. If the counter value after the subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-6, and if the counter value after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-6)
In step S105-4-11-6, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 stores "0", which indicates the normal gaming state, in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-7.

(Step S105-4-11-7)
In step S105-4-11-7, the main CPU 101 sets a game state command (normal) in the command transmission area in order to transmit the game state command (normal) indicating that the game is in the normal game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state command indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-8)
In step S105-4-11-8, the main CPU 101 judges whether the current game state is the normal game state. Specifically, it judges whether "0", which indicates the normal game state, is stored in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the current game state is the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-9. If the current game state is not the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-16.

(Step S105-4-11-9)
In step S105-4-11-9, the main CPU 101 updates (increments) the time-saving game state B activation game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the time-saving game state B activation game number counter is incremented by "+1." Then, after updating (incrementing) the time-saving game state B activation game number counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-10.
In addition, the update can be performed in either a pattern change game based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 21 or a pattern change game based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 22.
As described above, if the time-saving game state B does not win a winning game and the game state transitions to the normal game state, the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B is not updated in this process. The situation in which the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B is updated in this process corresponds to, for example, a situation in which the normal game state transitioned from the time-saving game state A is being played, or a situation in which the normal game state is being played after the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on and the area of the main RAM 103 is initialized.
Therefore, when the RAM clear switch 105 is turned on and the area of the main RAM 103 is initialized, this constitutes the establishment of a predetermined condition.

(Step S105-4-11-10)
In step S105-4-11-10, the main CPU 101 sets a game play counter command. Here, the game play counter command to be set is a command indicating the value of the game play counter for activating the time-saving game state B. Then, after setting the game play counter command, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-11.

(Step S105-4-11-11)
In step S105-4-11-11, the main CPU 101 determines whether the updated counter value is "898" as a result of updating (incrementing) the play count counter for activating the time-saving game state B in step S105-4-11-9. If the updated counter value is "898", the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-12, and if the updated counter value is not "898", the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-12)
In step S105-4-11-12, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the time-shortened gaming state B. Specifically, the main CPU 101 stores "3", which indicates the time-shortened gaming state, in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the gaming state is set to the time-shortened gaming state B, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-13.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the play count counter for activating time-saving play state B reaches "898" in the normal play state, the normal play state transitions to time-saving play state B. The play count counter for activating time-saving play state B is cleared, for example, in step S105-4-7 of FIG. 20, so that if the symbol change game is played "898" times in succession in the time-saving play state A and the normal play state without winning a winning game (a disadvantageous situation for the player), the game transitions to time-saving play state B as a rescue. This serves as a guideline for "898" times, and it is possible to reduce the number of players who continue playing without limit.

Note that below, the transition to time-saving game state B through this process may be referred to as "trigger 2" or "the time-saving game state activated (transitioned to) by trigger 2."

In addition, when multiple setting values are provided as described above, the value of the play count counter for activating time-saving play state B, which will transition to time-saving play state B, may be common for all setting values. For example, whether the setting value is 1 or 6, the value of the play count counter for activating time-saving play state B, which will transition to time-saving play state B, may be "898". This makes it possible to prevent players from blindly continuing to play without knowing which setting value is set, and makes it possible to clearly indicate a guideline, such as "898" times, regardless of the setting value.

On the other hand, when multiple setting values are provided as described above, the value of the play count counter for activating time-saving play state B, which will transition to time-saving play state B, may be different for each setting value. For example, it may be set to "898" when the setting value is 1, and "750" when the setting value is 6. This allows the setting value to be ascertained from the number of plays that transition to time-saving play state B, leading to increased interest in the game by drawing attention to the number of plays that transitions to time-saving play state B.

(Step S105-4-11-13)
In step S105-4-11-13, the main CPU 101 sets "1212" to the time-saving game state play count counter provided in the main RAM 103. That is, if the symbol change game is played "898" times in succession without winning a winning game in the time-saving game state A and the normal game state (a situation unfavorable to the player), the time-saving game state B of "1212" times is granted as a rescue. Then, when "1212" is set to the time-saving game state play count counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-14.

(Step S105-4-11-14)
In step S105-4-11-14, the main CPU 101 sets a game state command (time-saving B) in the command transmission area in order to transmit the game state command (time-saving B) indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state B to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state command indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state B is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-15.

(Step S105-4-11-15)
In step S105-4-11-15, the main CPU 101 clears the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B in the main RAM 103 (sets the counter value to 0). Then, after clearing the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B (sets the counter value to 0), the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-16)
In step S105-4-11-16, the main CPU 101 judges whether the current gaming state is the time-shortened gaming state B. Specifically, it judges whether "3", which indicates the time-shortened gaming state B, is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the current gaming state is the time-shortened gaming state B, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-17, and if the current gaming state is not the time-shortened gaming state B, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-22.

(Step S105-4-11-17)
In step S105-4-11-17, the main CPU 101 updates (subtracts) the time-saving game state play count counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the time-saving game state play count counter is set to "-1." Then, after updating (subtracting) the time-saving game state play count counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-18.

(Step S105-4-11-18)
In step S105-4-11-18, the main CPU 101 sets a game play counter command. Here, the game play counter command to be set is a command that indicates the value of the time-saving game state game play counter. After setting the game play counter command, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-19.

(Step S105-4-11-19)
In step S105-4-11-19, the main CPU 101 determines whether the counter value after the subtraction, which was updated (decremented) in step S105-4-11-17, is 0. If the counter value after the subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-20, and if the counter value after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-20)
In step S105-4-11-20, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 stores "0", which indicates the normal gaming state, in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-21.

(Step S105-4-11-21)
In step S105-4-11-21, the main CPU 101 sets a game state command (normal) in the command transmission area in order to transmit the game state command (normal) indicating that the game is in the normal game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state command indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-22)
In step S105-4-11-22, the main CPU 101 updates (increments) the probability variable state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the probability variable state game number counter is incremented by "+1." Then, after updating (incrementing) the probability variable state game number counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-23.

(Step S105-4-11-23)
In step S105-4-11-23, the main CPU 101 sets a game counter command. Here, the game counter command to be set is a command that indicates the value of the game counter in the probability variable game state. Then, when the game counter command is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.
In addition, when the number of plays in the special game state counter is updated (incremented) to 10,000, the same processing as steps S105-4-11-6 and S105-4-11-7 is carried out, but this is omitted in the flowchart.

(Regarding winning game processing)
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the winning game processing carried out in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-5 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-5-1)
In step S105-5-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a winning opening is in progress. In other words, it determines whether "0", which indicates a winning opening, is set in the winning status storage area of the main RAM 103. When the large prize opening is opened in step S105-5-3 described below, the value in the winning status storage area changes from "0" to "1". If a winning opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S105-5-2, and if a winning opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S105-5-4.

(Step S105-5-2)
In step S105-5-2, the main CPU 101 judges whether the time (e.g., "10S") corresponding to the winning opening set in step S105-4-11 of Fig. 20 described above has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the winning opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-5-3, and if the time corresponding to the winning opening has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-3)
In step S105-5-3, the main CPU 101 drives the large prize opening opening solenoid 24b to open the large prize opening 24. Also, the time management counter in the main RAM 103 is set to an opening time of 29.5 S. This starts the first round of the winning game. In this process, the value of the winning status storage area is changed from "0" to "1." Then, when the large prize opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-4)
In step S105-5-4, the main CPU 101 judges whether the large prize opening is being opened. It judges whether "1" indicating that the large prize opening is being opened is set in the winning status storage area of the main RAM 103. If the large prize opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step S105-5-5. If the large prize opening is not being opened, the process proceeds to step S105-5-7.

(Step S105-5-5)
In step S105-5-5, the main CPU 101 judges whether either of the following conditions for closing the large prize opening has been met: the large prize opening 24 has remained open for 29.5 seconds without the large prize opening detection SW 24a detecting the entry of 10 balls, or the large prize opening detection SW 24a detecting the entry of 10 balls. If the large prize opening closing condition is met, the process proceeds to step S105-5-6, and if the large prize opening closing condition is not met, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-6)
In step S105-5-6, the main CPU 101 transitions to the inter-round interval which constitutes the period from when the large prize opening 24 closes until the next opening. In this process, the value of the winning status storage area is changed from "1" to "2." Then, after transitioning to the inter-round interval, the process transitions to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-7)
In step S105-5-7, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is during an inter-round interval. That is, it judges whether or not "2", which indicates an inter-round interval, is set in the hit status storage area of the main RAM 103. If it is during an inter-round interval, the process proceeds to step S105-5-8, and if it is not during an inter-round interval, the process proceeds to step S105-5-13.

(Step S105-5-8)
In step S105-5-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is the end of the final round. For example, in step S105-5-11 described below, if the number of remaining rounds is "0" as a result of updating (incrementing or decrementing) the number of rounds, it is determined in this process that it is the end of the final round. If it is the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-5-9, and if it is not the end of the final round, the process proceeds to step S105-5-11.

(Step S105-5-9)
In step S105-5-9, the main CPU 101 transitions to an ending that notifies the user that the winning game has ended. In this process, the value in the winning state storage area is changed from "2" to "3." In addition, a time corresponding to the ending of the winning game (for example, 10S) is set in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. Then, when the transition to the ending has been made, the process transitions to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-10)
In step S105-5-10, the main CPU 101 sets an ending command in the command transmission area in order to transmit an ending command for executing a presentation corresponding to the ending of the winning game to the presentation control board 200. Then, when the ending command is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-11)
In step S105-5-11, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the round number counter in the main RAM 103. The updating method may be increment or decrement. For example, if a 5-round win is awarded, the round number counter in the main RAM 103 may be set to "5" and decremented by 1 each time a round is played, or the round number counter in the main RAM 103 may not be set to "5" and may be incremented by 1 each time a round is played. After updating the number of rounds, the process proceeds to step S105-5-12.

(Step S105-5-12)
In step S105-5-12, the main CPU 101 drives the large prize opening opening solenoid 24b to open the large prize opening 24. Also, the time management counter in the main RAM 103 is set to an opening time of 29.5 S. This starts the second and subsequent rounds of the winning game. In this process, the value in the winning status storage area is changed from "0" to "1." Then, when the large prize opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-13)
In step S105-5-13, the main CPU 101 judges whether the time (e.g., 10S) corresponding to the ending set in the above-mentioned step S105-5-9 has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the ending has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-5-14, and if the time corresponding to the ending has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-14)
In step S105-5-14, the main CPU 101 judges whether the special symbol is any of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E". In other words, the main CPU 101 judges whether the special symbol determined based on the win is any of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E". If the special symbol is any of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E", the process proceeds to step S105-5-15, and if the special symbol is not any of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E", the process proceeds to step S105-5-18.

(Step S105-5-15)
In step S105-5-15, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to a high probability gaming state. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets "2" in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, after setting "2" in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-5-16.

(Step S105-5-16)
In step S105-5-16, the main CPU 101 sets a game state command (probability change) in the command transmission area in order to transmit the game state command (probability change) indicating that the game is in a probability change game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state command indicating that the game is in a probability change game state is set, the process proceeds to step S105-5-17.

(Step S105-5-17)
In step S105-5-17, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Note that in this process, the value "0" indicating stopped is set, but as described above, during a winning game, the special symbol is in a stopped state, so this is merely a process to set a flag to start the next variation. Then, when the value "0" indicating stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-18)
In step S105-5-18, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state A. Therefore, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets "1" in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, after setting "1" in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-5-19.

Note that below, the transition to time-saving game state A through this processing may be referred to as "trigger 1" or "the time-saving game state activated (transitioned to) by trigger 1."

(Step S105-5-19)
In step S105-5-19, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving game state play count counter provided in the main RAM 103 to "100". This means that the time-saving game state A will start "100" times from the next change. Then, when the time-saving game state play count counter provided in the main RAM 103 is set to "100", the process proceeds to step S105-5-20.

Note that there may be multiple types of values set in the time-saving play state play count counter for both "Trigger 1" and "Trigger 2". Also, while one of "Trigger 1" and "Trigger 2" has multiple types, the other may have only one type.

(Step S105-5-20)
In step S105-5-20, the main CPU 101 sets a game state command (time-saving A) indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state A in the command transmission area to transmit the game state command (time-saving A) to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state command (time-saving A) indicating that the game is in the time-saving game state A is set, the process proceeds to step S105-5-21.

(Step S105-5-21)
In step S105-5-21, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Note that in this process, the value "0" indicating stopped is set, but as described above, during a winning game, the special symbol is in a stopped state, so this is merely a process to set a flag to start the next variation. Then, when the value "0" indicating stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding abnormality determination processing)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the abnormality determination processing performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S108 of the main control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S108-1)
In step S108-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a magnetic sensor input has been made. Specifically, it determines whether an input has been made from the magnetic sensor 27h. If an input has been made from the magnetic sensor 27h, the process proceeds to step S108-2. If an input has not been made from the magnetic sensor 27h, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-2)
In step S108-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h exceeds a specified value. If the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h exceeds the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-3, and if the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h does not exceed the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-3)
In step S108-3, the main CPU 101 sets a magnetic anomaly designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the magnetic anomaly designation command for reporting a magnetic anomaly to the performance control board 200. Then, when the magnetic anomaly designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-4)
In step S108-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a radio wave sensor input has been received. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an input has been received from the radio wave sensor 27i. If an input has been received from the radio wave sensor 27i, the process proceeds to step S108-5. If an input has not been received from the radio wave sensor 27i, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S108-5)
In step S108-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i exceeds a specified value. If the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i exceeds the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-6, and if the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i does not exceed the specified value, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S108-6)
In step S108-6, the main CPU 101 sets a radio wave abnormality designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the radio wave abnormality designation command for reporting the radio wave abnormality to the performance control board 200. Then, after setting the radio wave abnormality designation command, the process proceeds to step S109.

Next, we will explain the control processing performed by the sub-CPU 201 of the performance control board 200.

(Regarding control processing performed by sub-CPU 201)
The control programs shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 24 to FIG. 29 are stored in the sub ROM 202, and the sub CPU 201 reads out the control programs from the sub ROM 202 and performs control processing in accordance with the read out control programs.

(Step S200)
In step S200, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether the pachinko game machine 1 is in a power outage state. If the pachinko game machine 1 is in a power outage state, the sub-CPU 201 repeats the process of step S200, and if the pachinko game machine 1 is not in a power outage state, the sub-CPU 201 proceeds to step S201. If the pachinko game machine 1 is in a power outage state, the sub-CPU 201 can execute the process by using a backup power source (not shown).

(Step S201)
In step S201, the sub-CPU 201 performs an initial setting process to initialize the values of internally provided registers, etc. Then, when the initial setting process ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the sub-CPU 201 sets the CTC. That is, it sets the CTC (counter timer circuit) that has a function of generating a pulse output at a constant period and a function of measuring time, and sets the time constant register of the CTC so that the performance control board timer interrupt processing described later is performed periodically every 4 ms. Then, after setting the CTC, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the sub-CPU 201 inhibits the interruption of the performance control board timer interrupt process that periodically interrupts the performance control board main process and is executed. Then, when the interruption is inhibited, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the sub-CPU 201 updates the random numbers for effect. Then, when the update process of the random numbers for effect is completed, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the sub-CPU 201 allows the interruption of the performance control board timer interrupt process, which is executed by periodically interrupting the performance control board main process. Then, when the interruption is allowed, the process moves to step S203 again, and thereafter, steps S203 to S205 are looped.

(Regarding the performance control board timer interrupt processing)
25 is a flowchart showing the performance control board timer interruption process performed in the performance control board 200. This process is executed by periodically (for example, every 4 ms) interrupting the performance control board main process described above.

(Step S300)
In step S300, the sub CPU 201 saves the contents of the registers in a stack area. After saving the contents of the registers in the stack area, the process proceeds to step S301.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process of updating a timer managed by the performance control board 200. Then, after updating the timer, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 201 performs input processing of the operation device shown in Fig. 26. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 26. Then, when the input processing of the operation device ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 201 performs a main command receiving process shown in Fig. 27 and Fig. 28. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 27 and Fig. 28. Then, when the main command receiving process ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process of transmitting a sub-command. A sub-command is a command set in the main command receiving process of Figs. 27 and 28 described later, and in this process, the sub-command is transmitted to the image and sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, the image and sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c that have received the sub-command control the display, sound, light emission, and drive effects corresponding to the sub-command. Then, after transmitting the sub-command, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub-CPU 201 restores the contents saved in the stack area in step S300 to the register. Then, when the contents saved in the stack area are restored to the register, the performance control board timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Regarding operation device input processing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the operation device input processing performed in the performance control board 200 (a subroutine of step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a cross key detection SW (up or down) input has been made. The cross key detection SW 16a shown in Fig. 4 has SWs corresponding to the up, down, left, and right of the cross key button 16, and for example, if the up of the cross key button 16 is operated, it can be determined that a cross key detection SW (up) input has been made. If a cross key detection SW (up or down) input has been made, the process proceeds to step S302-2, and if a cross key detection SW (up or down) input has not been made, the process proceeds to step S302-5.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not an up-arrow key detection SW input has been performed. If an up-arrow key detection SW input has been performed, the process proceeds to step S302-3, and if an up-arrow key detection SW input has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S302-4.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub-CPU 201 changes (increases) the light quantity value managed by the sub-CPU 201, and sets a light quantity value change (increase) sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the light quantity value change (increase) sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. This makes it possible to increase the brightness of the image display device 26 and the light emitting device 9. Then, when the light quantity value change (increase) sub-command is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-4)
In step S302-4, the sub-CPU 201 changes (decreases) the light quantity value managed by the sub-CPU 201 and sets a light quantity value change (decrease) sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the light quantity value change (decrease) sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. This makes it possible to reduce the brightness of the image display device 26 and the light emitting device 9. Then, when the light quantity value change (decrease) sub-command is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-5)
In step S302-5, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a cross key detection SW (left or right) input has been performed. If a cross key detection SW (left or right) input has been performed, the process proceeds to step S302-6, and if a cross key detection SW (left or right) input has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S302-9.

(Step S302-6)
In step S302-6, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a right-direction cross key detection SW input has been performed, and if a right-direction cross key detection SW input has been performed, the process proceeds to step S302-7, whereas if a right-direction cross key detection SW input has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S302-8.

(Step S302-7)
In step S302-7, the sub-CPU 201 changes (increases) the volume value managed by the sub-CPU 201, and sets a volume value change (increase) sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the volume value change (increase) sub-command to the image and sound control unit 200b. This makes it possible to increase the volume value of background music, sound effects, etc. output from the speaker 10. Then, when the volume value change (increase) sub-command is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-8)
In step S302-8, the sub-CPU 201 changes (decreases) the volume value managed by the sub-CPU 201 and sets a volume value change (decrease) sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the volume value change (decrease) sub-command to the image and sound control unit 200b. This makes it possible to lower the volume value of background music, sound effects, etc. output from the speaker 10. Then, when the volume value change (decrease) sub-command is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

Note that steps S302-1 to S302-8 show the processing when the cross key button 16 is operated to adjust the volume or adjust the light intensity, but this is merely one example, and other processing may be performed by operating the cross key button 16. For example, processing to change an item in a menu may be performed by operating the cross key button 16.

(Step S302-9)
In step S302-9, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other operation devices. For example, if there is an input from the effect button detection SW 14a, it transmits an effect button operation subcommand to the image and sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c, and if there is an input from the effect lever detection SW 15a, it transmits an effect lever operation subcommand to the image and sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when the processing corresponding to the other operation devices is completed, the processing proceeds to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding main command reception processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing main command receiving process 1/2 performed in the performance control board 200 (a subroutine of step S301 of the performance control board timer interrupt process).

(Step S301-1)
In step S301-1, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a power-related information command has been received. Examples of power-related information commands include the power-on command and the power-restore command described above. If any of these commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-2. If any of these commands has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-6.

(Step S301-2)
In step S301-2, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing when it receives a power-related information command. For example, if it receives a power-on command, it performs processing related to power-on, and if it receives a power-restore command, it performs processing related to power-restore. Then, when it finishes the processing, it proceeds to step S301-3.

(Step S301-3)
In step S301-3, the sub-CPU 201 sets a power-related sub-command in a sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the power-related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-4.

(Step S301-4)
In step S301-4, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a power-on command has been received. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-5. If a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-5)
In step S301-5, the sub-CPU 201 performs the time-saving B suggestion effect determination process shown in Fig. 29. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 29. Then, when the time-saving B suggestion effect determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.
Details of the "Time-saving B suggestion effect" will be described in detail in Figure 57 etc.

(Step S301-6)
In step S301-6, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether an error related information command has been received. Examples of error related information commands include the above-mentioned magnetic anomaly designation command and radio wave anomaly designation command. If any of these commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-7. If any of these commands has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-9.

(Step S301-7)
In step S301-7, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing when an error-related information command is received. For example, if a magnetic anomaly designation command is received, processing related to a magnetic anomaly error is performed, and if a radio wave anomaly designation command is received, processing related to a radio wave anomaly error is performed. Then, when the processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-8.

(Step S301-8)
In step S301-8, the sub-CPU 201 sets an error-related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the error-related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-9)
In step S301-9, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a start port related information command has been received. Examples of start port related information commands include the first start port winning command, the second start port winning command, the first start port subtraction command, the second start port subtraction command, and the reserved memory area designation command. If any of these commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S301-10. If any of these commands have not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-13.

(Step S301-10)
In step S301-10, the sub-CPU 201 performs an icon change effect determination process. Specifically, when the first start opening winning command or the second start opening winning command is received, the sub-CPU 201 refers to the information on the judgment result of the winning time judgment process included in the command, and determines the display mode of the variable icon or reserved icon (the color of the variable icon or reserved icon described in the "reserved advance reading effect" described later). Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-11.

(Step S301-11)
In step S301-11, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process for determining whether or not to change the start port light emitting device. The light color of the start port light emitting device is linked to the color of the reserved icon determined in step S301-10. For example, if it is determined in step S301-10 that the color of the reserved icon is to be blue when the ball enters the start port, the start port light emitting device 21a also emits blue light. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S301-12.

(Step S301-12)
In step S301-12, the sub-CPU 201 sets the start hole related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the start hole related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-13)
In step S301-13, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not a game status related information command has been received. The game status related information command includes a game status command (normal), a game status command (time-saving A, time-saving B), and a game status command (probable bonus). If any of these commands have been received, the process proceeds to step S301-14, and if any of these commands have not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-16.

(Step S301-14)
In step S301-14, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing when it receives a game state related information command. For example, when it receives a game state command (normal), it performs processing related to the normal game state, when it receives a game state command (time-saving A, time-saving B), it performs processing related to each time-saving game state, and when it receives a game state command (probability variable), it performs processing related to the probability variable game state. Then, when it finishes this processing, it moves to step S301-15.

(Step S301-15)
In step S301-15, the sub-CPU 201 sets the game status related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the game status related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, after completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-16)
In step S301-16, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a gate passage command has been received, and if so, proceeds to step S301-17, whereas if not, proceeds to step S301-18.

(Step S301-17)
In step S301-17, the sub-CPU 201 sets the gate passage sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the gate passage sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding main command reception processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing main command receiving process 2/2 performed in the performance control board 200 (a subroutine of step S301 of the performance control board timer interrupt process).

(Step S301-18)
In step S301-18, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not a symbol designation command has been received. If a symbol designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-19. If a symbol designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-21.

(Step S301-19)
In step S301-19, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process when a symbol designation command is received. For example, when a symbol designation command designating a special symbol A is received, a combination of symbols of the decorative symbol "777" is determined so that the combination of symbols of "777" is determined and displayed as a decorative symbol. When a symbol designation command designating a special symbol A is received, a combination of symbols of the decorative symbol "444" may be determined so that the combination of symbols of "444" is determined and displayed as a decorative symbol. In this case, after the winning game ends, the time-saving game state A may be shifted to, so that the actual game state is a probability game state while the time-saving game state A appears to be in the time-saving game state. In this way, even if the time-saving game state A appears to be advantageous (probability game state), the interest in the game can be improved. Then, when the process is completed, the process is shifted to step S301-20.

(Step S301-20)
In step S301-20, the sub-CPU 201 sets the sub-symbol-related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the sub-symbol-related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-21)
In step S301-21, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not a special symbol variation pattern designation command has been received. If the special symbol variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-22. If the special symbol variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-30.

(Step S301-22)
In step S301-22, the sub-CPU 201 performs a variable performance pattern determination process. Specifically, a variable performance pattern corresponding to the specified special symbol variable pattern is determined from a variable performance pattern determination table (not shown) stored in the sub-ROM 202. In addition, in the variable performance pattern determination table, one or more variable performance patterns are associated with one special symbol variable pattern. For example, for the "normal variation" (7S) of "variation pattern 1", one corresponding variable performance pattern (7S) is prepared, and for the "super reach" (40S) of "variation pattern 3", multiple corresponding variable performance patterns (40S) are prepared. Then, when "variation pattern 3" is received, any one of the multiple prepared variable performance patterns is determined. In addition, since the multiple prepared variable performance patterns each have different performance contents, multiple performances can be executed for one variable pattern. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-23.

(Step S301-23)
In step S301-23, the sub-CPU 201 performs an icon change effect update process. The icon change effect update process is to update the color of the icon determined in step S301-10 based on a change scenario (not shown). For example, if the change scenario is blue → yellow, it is determined in this process to change to yellow. In other words, the color of the icon may change every time one variation is played. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-24.

(Step S301-24)
In step S301-24, the sub-CPU 201 performs a start port light-emitting device change performance update process. This process is performed in conjunction with the color updated in step S301-23. For example, if the color is updated to yellow in step S301-23, the start port light-emitting device 21a also changes from blue to yellow. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-25.

(Step S301-25)
In step S301-25, the sub-CPU 201 performs a jackpot notice performance determination process. Specifically, the jackpot notice performance to be executed in the symbol change game is determined from a jackpot notice performance determination table (not shown) stored in the sub-ROM 202. Here, the jackpot notice performance is a performance that can be executed in the symbol change game, and one or more jackpot notice performances can be executed in one symbol change game. In addition, the jackpot notice performance includes a performance that is difficult to determine when a special symbol hit determination process determines a hit and is easy to determine when a miss is determined (jackpot notice performance A), a performance that is easy to determine when a special symbol hit determination process determines a hit and is difficult to determine when a miss is determined (jackpot notice performance B), and a performance that can be determined only when a special symbol hit determination process determines a hit and is not determined when a miss is determined (jackpot notice performance C, so-called premium notice), etc. In addition, multiple predictions tend to be executed easily in a winning symbol change game, and are difficult to execute in a losing symbol change game (especially a losing normal change game). After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S301-26.

(Step S301-26)
In step S301-26, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether the game is a time-saving B suggestion effect execution game. The time-saving B suggestion effect execution game is assumed to be, for example, the first change after the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 (the first change after the game parlor opens). If the game is a time-saving B suggestion effect execution game, the process proceeds to step S301-27, and if the game is not a time-saving B suggestion effect execution game, the process proceeds to step S301-29.

The time-saving B suggestion effect execution game is not limited to the first change after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the first change after the gaming arcade opens), but may be another change. For example, it may be the 50th change after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the 50th change after the gaming arcade opens) or the 100th change after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the 100th change after the gaming arcade opens). In this way, if a time-saving B suggestion effect that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, an effect suggesting that the main RAM has been cleared) is executed in the first change after the gaming arcade opens, it is possible to prevent the first change from discouraging the player's desire to play.

(Step S301-27)
In step S301-27, the sub-CPU 201 sets a variation pattern-related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the variation pattern-related (including suggestive performance) sub-command (for example, the information determined in steps S301-22 to S301-25) to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. The variation pattern-related (including suggestive performance) sub-command includes execution instruction information for the time-saving B suggestive performance, and the time-saving B suggestive performance is executed in the image/sound control unit 200b or the light emission drive control unit 200c that receives the sub-command. The details of the time-saving B suggestive performance will be described in detail in FIG. 57 to FIG. 59. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-28.

(Step S301-28)
In step S301-28, the sub-CPU 201 turns off the time-saving B suggestion effect execution flag. The time-saving B suggestion effect execution flag is a flag that is turned on (in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 203) in the time-saving B suggestion effect determination process of Fig. 29, and includes a flag corresponding to a light-off effect, which will be described later, a flag corresponding to a red light effect, which will be described later, and a flag corresponding to a blue light effect, which will be described later. In the time-saving B suggestion effect execution game, any one of these flags is turned on, and the time-saving B suggestion effect corresponding to the flag that is turned on is executed. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-29)
In step S301-29, the sub-CPU 201 sets a variation pattern-related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit the variation pattern-related (not including the suggestive performance) sub-command (for example, the information determined in steps S301-22 to S301-25) to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Note that the variation pattern-related (not including the suggestive performance) sub-command does not include execution instruction information for the time-saving B suggestive performance. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-30)
In step S301-30, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not a recovery time game counter command has been received. If the recovery time game counter command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-31. If the recovery time game counter command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-32.

(Step S301-31)
In step S301-31, the sub-CPU 201 performs the time-saving B suggestion effect determination process shown in Fig. 29. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 29. Then, when the time-saving B suggestion effect determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-32)
In step S301-32, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether or not a game play counter command has been received. If a game play counter command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-33. If a game play counter command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-35.

(Step S301-33)
In step S301-33, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing upon receiving a game number counter command. Although not shown, the sub-RAM 203 also has an area for counting and storing the value of each game number counter, and upon receiving a game number counter command, the value of each game number counter is updated in the sub-RAM 203. This allows synchronization with the value of each game number counter on the main control board 100 side. Then, upon completion of this processing, the process proceeds to step S301-34.

(Step S301-34)
In step S301-34, the sub-CPU 201 sets a variation pattern-related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area in order to transmit a game number counter-related sub-command to the image and sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. For example, when the image and sound control unit 200b receives the sub-command, it updates and displays the number of games until the game state transitions to the time-saving game state B that can be displayed on the image display device 26. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-35)
In step S301-35, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other received commands. For example, when a setting value change command, a setting value information command, a setting value confirmation command, or a setting value confirmation end command is received, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to these received commands. Then, when the processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding the time-saving B suggestion performance decision process)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the time-saving B suggestion effect determination process carried out in the effect control board 200 (a subroutine of step S301-5 and step S301-31 of the main command receiving process).

(Step S301-5(31)-1)
In step S301-5(31)-1, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a power-on command has been received. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-5(31)-2. If a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-5(31)-4.

(Step S301-5(31)-2)
In step S301-5(31)-2, the sub-CPU 201 determines a light-off effect as the time-saving B suggestion effect. The light-off effect is an effect in which the light-emitting portion of the movable body 28 is turned off for a predetermined period of time from the start of the pattern change game, as shown in FIG. 57. In this way, when the light-emitting portion of the movable body 28 is turned off for a predetermined period of time from the start of the pattern change game, the player can know that each game counter has been cleared, and can use this as a factor in deciding whether or not to continue playing. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-5(31)-3.

(Step S301-5(31)-3)
In step S301-5(31)-3, the sub-CPU 201 turns on the light-off effect execution flag in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 203. This allows the sub-CPU 201 to determine which time-saving B suggestion effect (light-off effect, red light effect, or blue light effect) to execute in the above-mentioned step S301-27. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-5(31)-4)
In step S301-5(31)-4, the sub-CPU 201 refers to the value indicated by the recovery time game counter command. That is, if the power-on command has not been received (when recovery is in progress), the sub-CPU 201 refers to the value of each carried-over game counter (particularly, the value of the game counter for activating time-saving game state B). For example, if the value of the game counter for activating time-saving game state B at the time of closing of the gaming establishment on the previous day was "100", the value of the game counter for activating time-saving game state B will be "100" as a result of the reference in this process. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-5(31)-5.

(Step S301-5(31)-5)
In step S301-5(31)-5, the sub-CPU 201 judges whether the number of games remaining until the transition to the time-shortened game state B is less than 200. If the number of games remaining until the transition to the time-shortened game state B is less than 200, the process proceeds to step S301-5(31)-6. If the number of games remaining until the transition to the time-shortened game state B is not less than 200, the process proceeds to step S301-5(31)-8. For example, if the value of the game number counter for activating the time-shortened game state B is "100" in step S301-5(31)-4, the number of games remaining until the transition to the time-shortened game state B is "798", and the process is denied. On the other hand, for example, if the value of the play count counter for activating the time-saving play state B is "700" in step S301-5(31)-4, the number of plays remaining until the transition to the time-saving play state B is made is "198", and the processing is affirmative.

(Step S301-5(31)-6)
In step S301-5(31)-6, the sub-CPU 201 determines a red lighting effect as the time-saving B suggestion effect. The red lighting effect is an effect in which the light-emitting part of the movable body 28 is lit in red for a predetermined period from the start of the pattern change game, as shown in FIG. 57. In this way, when the light-emitting part of the movable body 28 is lit in red for a predetermined period from the start of the pattern change game, (the player) can understand that each game number counter has not been cleared, and can understand that there is only a small number of games left until the time-saving game state B is entered. This not only suggests that each game number counter has not been cleared, but also suggests how many games there are left until the time-saving game state B is entered, so that the player can pay attention to what kind of time-saving B suggestion effect will be executed. Then, when the process is completed, the process is transferred to step S301-5(31)-7.

(Step S301-5(31)-7)
In step S301-5(31)-7, the sub-CPU 201 turns on the red lighting effect execution flag in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 203. This allows the sub-CPU 201 to determine which time-saving B suggestion effect (lights-off effect, red lighting effect, or blue lighting effect) to execute in the above-mentioned step S301-27. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-5(31)-8)
In step S301-5(31)-8, the sub-CPU 201 determines a blue lighting effect as the time-saving B suggestion effect. The blue lighting effect is an effect in which the light-emitting part of the movable body 28 is lit in blue for a predetermined period from the start of the pattern change game, as shown in FIG. 57. In this way, when the light-emitting part of the movable body 28 is lit in blue for a predetermined period from the start of the pattern change game, the player can understand that each game number counter has not been cleared, and can understand that there is still a number of games required (not a small number of games remaining) until the time-saving game state B is entered. This not only suggests that each game number counter has not been cleared, but also suggests how many games there are left until the time-saving game state B is entered, so that the player can pay attention to what kind of time-saving B suggestion effect will be executed. Then, when the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-5(31)-9.

(Step S301-5(31)-9)
In step S301-5(31)-9, the sub-CPU 201 turns on the green lighting effect execution flag in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 203. This allows the sub-CPU 201 to determine which time-saving B suggestion effect (lights-off effect, red lighting effect, or blue lighting effect) to execute in the above-mentioned step S301-27. Then, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

Next, an example of the various effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is described below.

(Predictive performance)
The look-ahead performance is a performance that is executed based on the result of the pre-determination process (winning time determination process in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16) performed prior to the special pattern hit determination process in the special pattern change start process at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 21 or the second start hole 22. If the look-ahead performance is not installed, for example, when the game ball enters the first start hole 21, the determination information (random number value) is acquired and stored, and then the special pattern hit determination process is performed in the special pattern change start process, so even if the determination information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area", it is not determined whether or not there is a hit until the determination information (random number value) is transferred to the "change memory area". Therefore, even if the "hit" determination information (random number value) is acquired, it is not possible to execute a performance that increases the expectation of a hit at a stage before the determination information (random number value) is transferred to the "change memory area". However, if a pre-reading effect is installed, for example, a "pre-judgment process (judgment process at the time of winning)" can be performed to determine whether it is a "hit" or a "miss," and then continuous performance can be executed over multiple variations (including the variations transferred to the variable memory area) until the judgment information (random number value) is transferred to the "variable memory area," making it possible to increase the anticipation of a "hit" from a stage before the judgment information (random number value) is transferred to the "variable memory area."

A specific example of the above-mentioned look-ahead performance is a "reserved ball look-ahead performance." The "reserved ball look-ahead performance" is a performance that mainly uses the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 26o, the reserved icon displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j, and the reserved icon displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k to the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n. For example, when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third memory area," if a game ball enters the first start port 21, the judgment information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area" and then a pre-judgment process is performed. Then, based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process, if it is judged that a reserved ball look-ahead performance is to be performed, a pre-judgment reserved icon different from the default reserved icon (normal icon) of normal color (white) is displayed in the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. The pre-reading hold icon can be displayed in multiple types and multiple stages, such as "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "rainbow". If the result of the pre-determination process is a "win", any of "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "rainbow" can be displayed. If the result of the pre-determination process is a "miss", any of "blue", "yellow", "green", and "red" can be displayed. Then, "rainbow" is selectable only in the case of a "win", and "red" is made easy to select in the case of a "win", while "blue" is made easy to select in the case of a "miss", thereby increasing the expectation of "red" being a hit. The relationship of the expectation of a hit is as follows, from highest to lowest: rainbow > red > green > yellow > blue > normal. Hereinafter, such an effect may be referred to as a "hold change effect".

Another specific example of the above-mentioned pre-reading effect is a "win flash effect". The "win flash effect" is an effect in which, when a game ball enters the starting hole, the speaker lamp 10a provided on the lower speaker 10 lights up, and continues to light up until the symbol change game related to the ball entering starts, or until the symbol change game related to the ball entering is in progress, or until the symbol change game related to the ball entering ends, thereby improving the expectation of winning. For example, when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third memory area", if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the judgment information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area" and then a pre-judgment process is performed. Then, if it is judged based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process that a win flash effect is to be performed, a scenario (a scenario with a predetermined light color) for illuminating the speaker lamp 10a is selected, and the speaker lamp 10a is illuminated based on the selected scenario.
The color of the speaker lamp 10a is, for example, red > green > blue, in descending order of the expectation of winning, and it is possible to change the color to the color with the highest expectation of winning for each pattern change game, just like the reserved pre-reading performance described above. It is also possible to output a winning sound corresponding to each color.

In addition, a specific example of another type of the above-mentioned look-ahead performance is a "zone performance." The "zone performance" is a performance that mainly uses the image display device 26. For example, when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third memory area," if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the judgment information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area," and then a pre-judgment process is performed. Then, if it is determined based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process that a zone performance is to be performed, for example, in the next pattern change game, the image display device 26 performs a performance encouraging the player to enter, such as "If the special pattern is lined up, enter the XX zone!", and then the special pattern is lined up to enter the "XX zone," and the "XX zone" performance is performed until the judgment information (random number value) stored in the above-mentioned "fourth memory area" is transferred to the "change memory area." During the execution of this "XX zone" performance, the image display device 26 displays a caption such as "In the XX zone." Furthermore, the "zone effect" is likely to be executed if the pre-determination process determines that there is a "win" and is unlikely to be executed if there is a "lose," so if it is executed, there can be high hopes that a winning game will be awarded.

In addition, a specific example of another effect of the above-mentioned pre-reading effect is "Chance Eyes Continuous Notice". "Chance Eyes Continuous Notice" is an effect using the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c displayed mainly on the image display device 26. For example, when the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third memory area", if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the judgment information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area" and then a pre-judgment process is performed. Then, when it is judged based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process that a chance eye continuous effect is to be performed, for example, a combination of decorative pattern images of the same color is stopped in the confirmation display of the pattern change game corresponding to the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "first memory area", the confirmation display of the pattern change game corresponding to the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "second memory area", and the confirmation display of the pattern change game corresponding to the judgment information (random number value) stored in the "third memory area". For example, the decorative pattern image is composed of "333" and "777" in red, "111" and "555" in green, and "222", "444", "666", and "888" in blue, and by displaying multiple variations of combinations consisting only of red, such as "337" and "773", combinations consisting only of green, such as "115" and "551", and combinations consisting only of blue, such as "246" and "628", it creates an expectation that a win will be awarded in the subsequent pattern variation game. In the case of a win, it is easy to select a combination consisting only of red, and in the case of a loss, it is easy to select a combination consisting only of blue, increasing the expectation of a win when a combination consisting only of red is displayed.

(Pseudo consecutive announcement)
The pseudo consecutive prediction is a presentation that mainly uses the left decorative pattern image 26a, the center decorative pattern image 26b, the right decorative pattern image 26c displayed on the image display device 26, and the patterns dedicated to the pseudo consecutive, and in a "game of one change", the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is repeatedly performed to make it look as if the change is being performed multiple times. For example, as shown in FIG. 8, the pseudo consecutive can be performed two, three, or four times, and the more times it is performed, the higher the expectation of a win (in this embodiment, four times is a guaranteed win). As a specific performance content, for example, "5" is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern image 26a, "6" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, and a "pseudo consecutive exclusive pattern (e.g., "NEXT")" is temporarily displayed as the center decorative pattern image 26b, and all decorative pattern images are displayed in a variable manner again (at this point, pseudo consecutive two times), and again, "5" is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern image 26a, "6" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, and a "pseudo consecutive exclusive pattern (e.g., "NEXT")" is temporarily displayed as the center decorative pattern image 26b. and then all the decorative pattern images are displayed in a varying manner again (at this point, three pseudo consecutive hits; the same applies for four pseudo consecutive hits thereafter). For example, if, in the second temporary stop display, a "5" is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern image 26a and a "5" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, this will result in two pseudo consecutive hits; and if, in the second temporary stop display, a "5" is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern image 26a and a "6" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, this will result in three pseudo consecutive hits (the same applies for four pseudo consecutive hits thereafter). In addition, once a reach has been reached, a so-called "pseudo-consecutive streak" can be temporarily displayed as the middle decorative pattern image 26b (e.g., "NEXT"), or, for example, when the fluctuation starts after the first temporary stop display, a notice (pattern stop notice) can be given that a "pseudo-consecutive streak exclusive pattern (e.g., "NEXT") will be temporarily displayed in the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and at that point, three or more pseudo-consecutive streaks are confirmed.

(Regarding the relationship between the winning sound, change sound, and start port light-emitting device (color) for each icon)
30 is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning sound, the change sound, and the start hole light emitting device (color) for each icon. In the figure, the determination time corresponds to the above-mentioned "icon change effect determination process", and the update time corresponds to the above-mentioned "icon change effect update process". The winning sound and the change sound are the same when the ball enters the first start hole 21 and when the ball enters the second start hole 22.

When the default "normal icon" is displayed, a "ping-pong" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a winning sound when the ball lands in the starting hole.
In addition, in the change scenario, for example, there is no change from a blue icon to a normal icon, so the column at the time of update is "-".
When the "normal icon" is displayed, the light emitted from the starting port light-emitting device 21a is white.

When the "blue icon" is displayed, the sound "plonk" is output from the speaker 10 as the winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
When the normal icon changes to a blue icon, a "plonk" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a sound produced when the icon changes from a normal icon to a blue icon.
Furthermore, when the "blue icon" is displayed, the light color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is blue.

When the "yellow icon" is displayed, a "keen" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a winning sound when the ball lands in the starting hole.
When the icon changes from a normal icon to a yellow icon, or from a blue icon to a yellow icon, a "keen" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a sound indicating the change upon updating.
Furthermore, when the "yellow icon" is displayed, the light color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is yellow.

When the "green icon" is displayed, the sound "Ka-n" is output from the speaker 10 as a winning sound when the ball lands in the starting hole.
When the icon changes from a normal icon to a green icon, from a blue icon to a green icon, or from a yellow icon to a green icon, a "Kaan" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a sound indicating the change upon updating.
Furthermore, when the "green icon" is displayed, the light color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is green.

When the "red icon" is displayed, the sound "Ja-ki-n" is output from the speaker 10 as the winning sound when the ball lands in the starting hole.
When a normal icon changes to a red icon, when a blue icon changes to a red icon, when a yellow icon changes to a red icon, or when a green icon changes to a red icon, a "ja-ki-in" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a sound of change at the time of updating.
Furthermore, when the "red icon" is displayed, the light color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is red.

When the "rainbow icon" is displayed, the sound "Kyuuueen♪" is output from the speaker 10 as a winning sound when the ball lands in the starting hole.
When a normal icon changes to a rainbow icon, when a blue icon changes to a rainbow icon, when a yellow icon changes to a rainbow icon, when a green icon changes to a rainbow icon, or when a red icon changes to a rainbow icon, a "queeeeen♪" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a sound of change at the time of updating.
When displaying the "rainbow icon", the light emitted by the start port light emitting device 21a is rainbow colored.

In this embodiment, the icons (the variable icon, the pending icon) are hidden while the Super Reach is being executed, because the Super Reach performance is executed using almost the entire display area.
In this way, even if an icon is hidden during execution of a super reach (for example, if a red icon is displayed and is then hidden), the starting port light-emitting device 21a visibly emits light in the color (red) corresponding to the hidden icon, so that the color the icon has changed to can be recognized from the starting port light-emitting device 21a.

In addition, a corresponding winning sound or change sound is set for each icon, making it easier for players to notice when an icon has changed (such as the color it has changed to).

When a super reach is in progress, the icons (the relevant variable icon, the pending icon) may be displayed, or only the relevant variable icon may be displayed.

The light emitted by the start port light emitting device 21a may be turned off, for example, when the symbol variation game ends (confirmation display). The timing of the erasure of the variation icon and the turning off of the start port light emitting device 21a may be different (for example, the erasure may be earlier than the turning off, or the erasure may be earlier than the turning off), or they may be the same.

(Regarding control processing performed by the image/sound CPU 204)
Next, the control processing performed by the image/sound CPU 204 will be described with reference to Fig. 31 to Fig. 34. Fig. 31 to Fig. 33 show the image/sound control unit main processing performed by the image/sound CPU 204, and Fig. 34 shows the image/sound control unit timer interrupt processing which is performed by periodically (every 33 ms) interrupting the image/sound control unit main processing.

(Step S400-1)
In step S400-1, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether a volume/light value related subcommand has been received. In other words, it determines whether a volume/light value related subcommand has been received from the performance control unit 200a. Note that various subcommands are received by the image/sound control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. Then, if a volume/light value related subcommand has been received, the process proceeds to step S400-2, and if a volume/light value related subcommand has not been received, the process proceeds to step S400-3.

(Step S400-2)
In step S400-2, the image/sound CPU 204 performs the process for receiving a volume/light value related sub-command shown in Fig. 32. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 32. Then, when the process for receiving a volume/light value related sub-command is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-3.

(Step S400-3)
In step S400-3, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether a power-related subcommand has been received, and if so, proceeds to step S400-4, whereas if not, proceeds to step S400-5.

(Step S400-4)
In step S400-4, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives a power-related subcommand related to the power-on command, it performs image/sound setting processing related to power-on, and when it receives a power-related subcommand related to the power restoration command, it performs image/sound setting processing related to power restoration. An example of a notification mode by display and sound executed by performing image/sound setting processing related to power restoration will be described in detail later using FIG. 39 etc. Then, when the image/sound setting processing for power-on or power restoration is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-5.

(Step S400-5)
In step S400-5, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether or not a game status related subcommand has been received. If a game status related subcommand has been received, the process proceeds to step S400-6. If a game status related subcommand has not been received, the process proceeds to step S400-8.

(Step S400-6)
In step S400-6, the image/sound CPU 204 updates the game state corresponding to the received game state related subcommand in a predetermined area (game state management area) of the RAM (not shown), for example. Specifically, if the received game state related subcommand indicates a normal game state, the value of the predetermined area of the RAM is set to "0", if the received game state related subcommand indicates a time-saving game state A, the value of the predetermined area of the RAM is set to "1", if the received game state related subcommand indicates a probability-changing game state, the value of the predetermined area of the RAM is set to "2", and if the received game state related subcommand indicates a time-saving game state B, the value of the predetermined area of the RAM is set to "3". Then, after updating the game state, the process proceeds to step S400-7.

(Step S400-7)
In step S400-7, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the updated game state. For example, if the game state is updated to the normal game state in step S400-6, the display and sound (BGM, etc.) corresponding to the normal game state are output by the processing of step S400-7. Then, when the image/sound setting processing corresponding to the updated game state is completed, the processing proceeds to step S400-8.

(Step S400-8)
In step S400-8, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether or not a start port related subcommand has been received. If a start port related subcommand has been received, the process proceeds to step S400-9. If a start port related subcommand has not been received, the process proceeds to step S400-10.

(Step S400-9)
In step S400-9, the image/sound CPU 204 performs the process when the start port related sub-command is received, as shown in Fig. 33. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 33. Then, when the process when the start port related sub-command is received ends, the process proceeds to step S400-10.

(Step S400-10)
In step S400-10, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether or not a gate pass subcommand has been received. If a gate pass subcommand has been received, the process proceeds to step S400-11. If a gate pass subcommand has not been received, the process proceeds to step S400-13.

(Step S400-11)
In step S400-11, the image/sound CPU 204 judges whether the game state is the normal game state. Specifically, the image/sound CPU 204 refers to the value in the predetermined area of the RAM described in step S400-6 and judges whether the value is "0". If the value is "0", the process proceeds to step S400-12, and if the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S400-13.

(Step S400-12)
In step S400-12, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to a left hit. That is, even though the game is in a normal game state, it determines that a right hit is being performed, and performs setting processing to notify the player to make a left hit. An example of a notification mode by display and sound executed by performing image/sound setting processing corresponding to a left hit will be described in detail later using FIG. 38 and the like. Then, when the image/sound setting processing corresponding to a left hit is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
In step S400-13, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether an error-related subcommand has been received, and if so, proceeds to step S400-14, and if not, proceeds to step S400-15.

(Step S400-14)
In step S400-14, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the error content. An example of a notification mode by display and sound executed by performing image/sound setting processing corresponding to the error content will be described in detail later using Figure 50 etc. Then, when the image/sound setting processing corresponding to the error content is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-15.

(Step S400-15)
In step S400-15, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the other subcommands, and when the image/sound setting processing corresponding to the other subcommands is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-16.

(Step S400-16)
In step S400-16, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether a frame switching flag is ON in a flag management area (not shown) provided in the image/sound control unit 200b. The frame switching flag is turned ON by the image/sound control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, so that it is turned ON every 33 ms. In other words, one frame of image is displayed every 33 ms in the image display device 26. The management area for managing the frame switching flag may be provided in a dedicated RAM, or the VRAM 207 may be used. If the frame switching flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S400-17, and if the frame switching flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S400-1.

(Step S400-17)
In step S400-17, the image/sound CPU 204 performs processing to turn off the frame switch flag. Then, after turning off the frame switch flag, the process proceeds to step S400-18.

(Step S400-18)
In step S400-18, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image generation processing. Specifically, image information for one frame is generated based on the contents set in each image/sound setting process. In this way, an image for one frame is generated. The concept of image generation will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. Then, when the image generation processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-19.

(Step S400-19)
In step S400-19, the image/sound CPU 204 performs sound generation processing. Specifically, sound information for one frame is generated based on the contents set in each image/sound setting process. In this way, sound for one frame is generated. Then, when the sound generation processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-20.

(Step S400-20)
In step S400-20, the image/sound CPU 204 performs processing to output the image and sound for the one generated frame. As a result, the image for the one generated frame is displayed on the image display device 26, and the sound for the one generated frame is output from the speaker 10. Then, when the output processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-1.

(Processing when receiving subcommands related to volume and light levels)
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the process performed by the image/sound CPU 204 when a subcommand related to volume value/light amount value is received (a subroutine of step S400-2 of the main process of the image/sound control unit).

(Step S400-2-1)
In step S400-2-1, the image/sound CPU 204 determines whether a level gauge image is being displayed. As described above, a level gauge image is an image that indicates the degree of adjustment of the amount of light or volume, and will be described later in FIG. 41 etc. If a level gauge image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S400-2-2, and if a level gauge image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S400-2-4.

The level gauge image showing the degree of light adjustment and the level gauge image showing the degree of volume adjustment begin to be displayed when the process of step S400-2-4 described below is performed. Then, even if no light or volume adjustment operation is performed, the image continues to be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds). On the other hand, when the light or volume adjustment operation is performed, the process of step S400-2-3 described below is performed to switch to a level gauge image corresponding to the degree of adjustment (see FIG. 41).

(Step S400-2-2)
In step S400-2-2, the image/sound CPU 204 performs an update process according to the contents of the received subcommand related to the volume value and light quantity value. For example, when a light quantity value change (increase) subcommand is received, the light quantity value is increased by one step, and when a light quantity value change (decrease) subcommand is received, the light quantity value is decreased by one step, and the updated value is stored in a predetermined area (area for managing the volume value and light quantity value) of a RAM (not shown). When a volume value change (increase) subcommand is received, the volume value is increased by one step, and when a volume value change (decrease) subcommand is received, the volume value is decreased by one step, and the updated value is stored in a predetermined area (area for managing the volume value and light quantity value) of a RAM (not shown). Then, when the update process is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-2-3.

(Step S400-2-3)
In step S400-2-3, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the updated value. For example, if the current volume value is 3 and a volume value change (decrease) subcommand is received, a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2 and an adjustment sound corresponding to volume value 2 are set (see FIG. 41). Then, when the image/sound setting processing corresponding to the updated value is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-3 of the image/sound control unit main processing.

(Step S400-2-4)
In step S400-2-4, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to the current value. For example, if the current volume value is 3, a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 3 and an adjustment sound corresponding to volume value 3 are set. Then, when the image/sound setting processing corresponding to the updated value is completed, the process proceeds to step S400-3 of the image/sound control unit main processing.

In the processing of FIG. 32 described above, if a volume/light value related sub-command is received but the level gauge image is not displayed, the processing of step S400-2-4 first displays the level gauge image corresponding to the current value (e.g., this corresponds to the first operation).
On the other hand, if a level gauge image is being displayed, the value is updated in step S400-2-2, and a level gauge image corresponding to the updated value is displayed in step S400-2-3 (for example, this corresponds to a second operation performed consecutively after the first operation).
That is, a level gauge image corresponding to the current value is displayed upon a first operation, and the value (light amount value, volume value) can be changed upon a second operation that is performed consecutively.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the light intensity value and the volume value from being changed unintentionally due to accidentally touching the cross key button 16 during a game.
Of course, the light intensity value and the volume value may be changed upon initial operation.

(Regarding processing when receiving start port related subcommands)
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the process performed by the image/sound CPU 204 when a start port related subcommand is received (a subroutine of step S400-9 of the image/sound control unit main process).

(Step S400-9-1)
In step S400-9-1, the image/sound CPU 204 performs a process of updating a reserved number counter (not shown) provided in the image/sound control unit 200b. That is, the image/sound control unit 200b can also recognize the storage status of the judgment information storage area (reserved storage area) of the main RAM 103 by the start-hole related subcommand transmitted from the performance control unit 200a. That is, the reserved number counter provided in the image/sound control unit 200b can also recognize "0" stored only in the variable storage area, "1" stored up to the first storage area, "2" stored up to the second storage area, "3" stored up to the third storage area, and "4" stored up to the fourth storage area. Note that the reserved number counter may be provided with a dedicated RAM or may use the VRAM 207. Then, when the reserved number counter is updated, the process proceeds to step S400-9-2.

(Step S400-9-2)
In step S400-9-2, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound (winning sound) setting processing corresponding to the updated reserved number counter value. For example, if the reserved number counter value of the first start port 21 is 3 and a start port related subcommand (without reserved pre-reading performance) related to the first start port winning command is received, the processing is set so that the normal icon described in FIG. 31 is displayed and the winning sound "Piron ♪" is output. Then, when the image/sound setting processing corresponding to the updated reserved number counter value is completed, the processing proceeds to step S400-9-3.

(Step S400-9-3)
In step S400-9-3, the image/sound CPU 204 judges whether the game state is not the normal game state and whether a start hole related subcommand related to the first start hole winning command has been received. Specifically, the image/sound CPU 204 refers to a predetermined area (game state management area) of the RAM (not shown) described in step S400-6 and judges whether a value other than "0" is stored. If a value other than "0" is stored, it further judges whether a start hole related subcommand related to the first start hole winning command has been received. If both of these conditions are met, the process proceeds to step S400-9-4, and if neither of these conditions are met, the process proceeds to step S400-10 of the image/sound control unit main process.

(Step S400-9-4)
In step S400-9-4, the image/sound CPU 204 performs image/sound setting processing corresponding to right hitting. That is, even if the time-saving game state (A, B) or the probability variation game state is in effect, it determines that a left hit is being performed, and performs setting processing to notify the player to make a right hit. An example of a notification mode by display and sound executed by performing image/sound setting processing corresponding to right hitting will be described in detail later using FIG. 40 and the like. Then, when the image/sound setting processing corresponding to right hitting is completed, the processing is transferred to step S400-10 of the image/sound control unit main processing.

(Image and sound control unit timer interrupt processing)
34 is a flowchart showing image/sound control unit timer interrupt processing performed in the image/sound CPU 204. This processing is executed by periodically (for example, every 33 ms) interrupting the above-mentioned image/sound control unit main processing.

(Step S500)
In step S500, the image/sound CPU 204 performs a process of receiving various sub-commands. That is, the image/sound CPU 204 performs a process of receiving various sub-commands from the performance control unit 200a. Then, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives various sub-commands, the process proceeds to step S501.

(Step S501)
In step S501, the image/sound CPU 204 performs processing to update the frame counter, etc. Then, after updating the frame counter, etc., the process proceeds to step S502.

(Step S502)
In step S502, the image/sound CPU 204 sets the frame switch flag to ON, and then ends the image/sound control unit timer interrupt process.

(Regarding control processing performed by the light emission drive CPU 208)
Next, the control processing performed by the light emission drive CPU 208 will be described with reference to Figures 35 and 36. Figure 35 shows the light emission drive control unit main processing performed by the light emission drive CPU 208, and Figure 36 shows the light emission drive control unit timer interrupt processing which is performed by periodically (every 33 ms) interrupting the light emission drive control unit main processing.

(Step S600-1)
In step S600-1, the light emission drive CPU 208 judges whether various subcommands have been received. In other words, it judges whether any subcommands have been received from the performance control unit 200a. The various subcommands are received in the light emission drive control unit timer interrupt process of Fig. 36. Then, if various subcommands have been received, the process proceeds to step S600-2, and if various subcommands have not been received, the process proceeds to step S600-5.

(Step S600-2)
In step S600-2, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs light emission and drive setting processing. Specifically, it sets the light emission pattern of the light emitting device 9 etc. corresponding to the received subcommand, and sets the drive pattern of the movable body 28. When the light emission pattern of the light emitting device 9 etc. corresponding to the subcommand is set, light emission is controlled according to the light emission pattern set in step S600-7 described later, and when the drive pattern of the movable body 28 corresponding to the subcommand is set, drive is controlled according to the drive pattern set in step S600-8 described later. Then, when the light emission and drive setting processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S600-3.

(Step S600-3)
In step S600-3, the light emission driving CPU 208 judges whether or not the start port related subcommand has been received. If the start port related subcommand has been received, the process proceeds to step S600-4. If the start port related subcommand has not been received, the process proceeds to step S600-5.

(Step S600-4)
In step S600-4, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs a process of updating a reserved number counter (not shown) provided in the light emission drive control unit 200c. That is, the light emission drive control unit 200c can also recognize the storage status of the judgment information storage area (reserved storage area) of the main RAM 103 by the start-hole related subcommand transmitted from the performance control unit 200a. That is, the reserved number counter provided in the light emission drive control unit 200c can also recognize "0" stored only in the variable storage area, "1" stored up to the first storage area, "2" stored up to the second storage area, "3" stored up to the third storage area, and "4" stored up to the fourth storage area. Note that the reserved number counter may be provided with a dedicated RAM or may use the light emission drive RAM 210. Then, when the reserved number counter is updated, the process proceeds to step S600-5.

(Step S600-5)
In step S600-5, the light emission drive CPU 208 judges whether the frame switching flag is ON in a flag management area (not shown) provided in the light emission drive control unit 200c. The frame switching flag is turned ON by the light emission drive control unit timer interrupt processing of FIG. 36, so that it is turned ON every 33 ms. As a result, for example, in the sub-reservation display, the display is updated every 33 ms. The management area for managing the frame switching flag may be provided with a dedicated RAM, or the light emission drive RAM 210 may be used. Then, if the frame switching flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S600-6, and if the frame switching flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S600-1.

(Step S600-6)
In step S600-6, the light emission driving CPU 208 performs processing to turn off the frame switch flag. Then, after turning off the frame switch flag, the process proceeds to step S600-7.

(Step S600-7)
In step S600-7, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs light emission control processing. Specifically, the light emission device 9 and the like are caused to emit light based on the light emission pattern set in step S600-2. Then, when the light emission control processing ends, the process proceeds to step S600-8.

(Step S600-8)
In step S600-8, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs drive control processing. Specifically, if a drive pattern for the movable body 28 is set in step S600-2, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs drive control for the movable body 28. Then, when the drive control processing ends, the process proceeds to step S600-1.

(Light Emission Drive Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing)
36 is a flowchart showing light emission drive control unit timer interrupt processing performed in the light emission drive CPU 208. This processing is executed by periodically (for example, every 33 ms) interrupting the above-mentioned light emission drive control unit main processing.

(Step S700)
In step S700, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs a process of receiving various sub-commands. That is, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs a process of receiving various sub-commands from the performance control unit 200a. Then, when various sub-commands are received, the process proceeds to step S701.

(Step S701)
In step S701, the light emission drive CPU 208 performs processing to update the frame counter, etc. Then, after updating the frame counter, etc., the process proceeds to step S702.

(Step S702)
In step S702, the light emission drive CPU 208 sets the frame switch flag to ON. Then, when the frame switch flag is set to ON, the light emission drive control unit timer interrupt process ends.

FIG. 37 is a conceptual diagram supplementing the image generation process of step S400-18 in FIG.
In the image generation process, a plurality of layers are synthesized to generate one display frame.
It should be noted that the layers shown in FIG. 37 are merely an example, and the number of layers, display contents, etc. are not limited to this.

Layer 1 is the layer at the forefront of the screen, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information related to the power supply and information related to errors.
Power supply-related information and error-related information are displayed, for example, by displaying the entire display area in black with a message such as "Screen display recovering" or "Radio wave error" in white letters.
As a result, the entire display area will be displayed in black, and if information about the power supply or an error is displayed on that layer, the display contents of the layers located further back on the screen (Layer 2 to Layer 7) will be invisible (even if some content is displayed on each layer).
On the other hand, when no information related to the power supply or errors is displayed in the layer, the display contents of the layers (layers 2 to 7) located further back on the screen than the layer in question can be seen.
In the image generation process, for example, layers 1 to 7 are combined to generate one display frame, regardless of whether information related to the power supply or information related to an error is displayed in layer 1.
For example, the VRAM 207 is provided with drawing areas (drawing area 1 to drawing area 7) corresponding to layers 1 to 7, respectively, and layers 1 to 7 are stored in the drawing areas (drawing area 1 to drawing area 7).The stored layers 1 to 7 are then composited to generate one display frame.

The error-related information displayed on layer 1 corresponds to more serious errors, such as the magnetic error detected by the magnetic sensor 27h and the radio wave error detected by the radio wave sensor 27i.
On the other hand, minor errors are displayed, for example, in a layer located further back on the screen than Layer 1, and even when information about minor errors is displayed, the display contents of the layer located further back on the screen than that layer are visible. In other words, information about minor errors and other information are allowed to be displayed simultaneously.
In addition, a minor error may be, for example, a "ball removal error (notification to remove the ball)" that is notified when a game ball remains in the lower tray 5b and is not ejected from the lower tray 5b.
In this way, in the case of a serious error, the display content of other layers is made invisible, and in the case of a minor error, the display content of other layers is made visible, allowing the administrator to quickly grasp the severity of the error.

Layer 2 is a layer located further back on the screen than Layer 1, and is used to display (draw) information regarding holds.
As shown in FIG. 37, the information regarding the reserve includes the number reserve displayed in the first starting port reserve number image 26e and the second starting port reserve number image 26f, the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 26o, and the reserve icons displayed in the first starting port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j, and the second starting port first reserved ball image display area 26k to the second starting port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n.
In addition, even if information regarding a hold is displayed (drawn) on layer 2, the display contents of the layers (layers 3 to 7) located further back on the screen than layer 2 can be seen.

In addition, when the above-mentioned "waiting for customers" is in progress, the floating icon and the hold icon are not displayed (drawn) on layer 2.
On the other hand, even if the player is "waiting for customers," the reserved number displayed in the first start port reserved number image 26e and the second start port reserved number image 26f is "0" is displayed (drawn) on layer 2. This allows the player to know that the number of available symbol change games is "0."

In addition, when the above-mentioned "demo performance" is in progress, the variable icon, the reserved icon, and the number reserved are not displayed (drawn) on layer 2. This allows the user to focus on the model name and manufacturer name display (manufacturer logo) displayed during the demo performance.
In addition, the "demo performance in progress" may be displayed in the same manner as the "waiting for customers" above.

Layer 3 is a layer located further back on the screen than Layer 2, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information related to the performance settings.
As shown in FIG. 37, the information relating to the performance settings includes a speaker icon image 26sp indicating a speaker icon, a level gauge image indicating the degree of volume adjustment (in the example of FIG. 37, it indicates volume value level 3), a lamp icon image indicating a lamp icon, and a level gauge image indicating the degree of light adjustment (all of which are omitted from the illustration).
If the volume or light amount has not been adjusted, layer 3 will be composited with the other layers without displaying anything.
Furthermore, even if information related to the performance settings is displayed (drawn) on layer 3, the display contents of layers (layers 4 to 7) located further back on the screen than layer 3 can be seen.

Layer 4 is a layer located further back on the screen than layer 3, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information relating to the preview performance (the jackpot preview performance mentioned above).
As shown in FIG. 37, information relating to the preview performance includes, for example, a lightning bolt image 26yk that resembles a lightning bolt (a preview that appears when the game develops into a super reach) and images corresponding to other preview performances.
In addition, if no preview is performed, layer 4 will be composited with the other layers without displaying anything.
Furthermore, even if information relating to the preview performance is displayed (drawn) on Layer 4, the display contents of the layers (Layer 5 to Layer 7) located further back on the screen than Layer 4 can be seen.

Layer 5 is a layer located deeper on the screen than layer 4, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information relating to the design.
As shown in FIG. 37, the information relating to the patterns includes a left decorative pattern image 26a, a center decorative pattern image 26b, a right decorative pattern image 26c, and a fourth pattern image 26d.
It should be noted that even if information relating to the design is displayed (drawn) on layer 5, the display contents of layers (layers 6 to 7) located further back on the screen than layer 5 can be seen.

Layer 6 is located further back on the screen than layer 5, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information relating to the state.
As shown in FIG. 37, the information regarding the state includes a left-hitting image 26lh that prompts the player to hit with the left hand, and a right-hitting image 26rh that prompts the player to hit with the right hand.
The right-hit image 26rh is displayed during a time-saving game state or a special game state.
The left-hand hit image 26lh is displayed when the game state transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, or when a right-hand hit is made in the normal game state and the game ball passes through the gate member 20.
In addition, when a left-handed shot is being performed during normal gameplay, layer 6 will not display anything and will be composited with other layers.
Furthermore, even if status-related information is displayed (drawn) on layer 6, the display contents of a layer (layer 7) located further back on the screen than layer 6 can be seen.

Layer 7 is a layer located further back on the screen than layer 6, and is a layer for displaying (drawing) information related to the background.
As shown in FIG. 37, information relating to the background includes, for example, a background image hk indicating a normal game state, a background image indicating a time-saving game state (not shown), a background image indicating a special game state (not shown), and a background image indicating a winning state (not shown).
In the image generating process, the above layers 1 to 7 are synthesized to form one frame, and the display screen shown in FIG. 38 and subsequent figures is displayed.

(A diagram for explaining a first example of a notification mode)
Next, a first example of a notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 38 assumes that a game ball passes through the gate member 20 during execution of a pattern variation game in the normal gaming state (i.e., a right hit is performed in the normal gaming state).
Specifically, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives the gate passing sub-command at timing T1, it draws left-hit information (left-hit image 26lh) in layer 6. It also outputs a sound from the speaker 10 encouraging the player to hit with the left hand.
As a result, the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying "Please hit with your left hand," and the image display device 26 displays left-hand hit information (left-hand hit image 26lh).
In FIG. 38, layers 1 to 7 are always composited and displayed both before and after timing T1.
In this way, when a right-handed hit is made during normal game play, a notification is given encouraging the player to make a left-handed hit.

(A diagram for explaining a second example of a notification mode)
Next, a second example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 39 assumes that a game ball passes through the gate member 20 while power is being restored in the normal game state (when a power restoration command is received) (i.e., when a right-hand hit is performed while power is being restored in the normal game state).
Specifically, until timing T1, the power supply is OFF, and the image display device 26 is also OFF (not displayed) as indicated by the diagonal lines.
When the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts a recovery process, and the image display device 26 displays "screen display recovering."
At this time, the screen display recovery information is drawn on layer 1, and the information is not drawn on layer 6.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are composited together, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a gate pass sub-command. In this case, as described in FIG. 37, left hit information (left hit image 26lh) is drawn in layer 6, and a sound encouraging the player to hit with the left is output from the speaker 10. However, since the screen display return information is still drawn in layer 1, although left hit information (left hit image 26lh) is drawn, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, it is not visible due to the display content of layer 1, and the speaker 10 only issues the sound "Please hit with the left."

Then, at timing T3, when the return condition is satisfied, the display during the screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-symbols, etc. are visibly displayed. The return condition being satisfied here may be when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined command (e.g., a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) has been received.
Furthermore, when the image display device 26 returns to normal, the left hit information (left hit image 26lh) is visibly displayed.
At this time, layer 1 is not yet rendered and nothing is displayed (drawn), and the display contents of layer 2 and onwards can be viewed when the layers are composited and displayed on the image display device 26. Therefore, the left hit information (left hit image 26lh) is visible.

In this way, when the power is restored during normal game play, if a game ball passes through the gate member 20, the image display device 26 only displays a message while the screen display is being restored, and the notification encouraging the player to hit the ball with his left hand is only performed by the speaker 10.
As a result, for example, by visually checking the image display device 26, the manager can understand that the screen display is being restored when power is restored, and by hearing the notification from the speaker 10 urging the player to make a left hit, the player can understand the game he should play (to hit with the left hand) even if left hit information (left hit image 26lh) is not displayed.
Furthermore, as shown at timing T2, even when the screen display is being restored and the left hit information (left hit image 26lh) is not visible, the left hit information is drawn in layer 6. Then, layers 1 to 7 are composited and displayed.
This allows for uniform processing, such as composite display of layers 1 to 7, regardless of whether power has been restored or not. For example, processing specific to when power is restored, such as not drawing left-hit information in layer 6 when a gate-passing subcommand is received but power is being restored, can be eliminated, and processing can be uniformly set to draw left-hit information in layer 6 when a gate-passing subcommand is received.

The volume value of the message "Please hit left" output from the speaker 10 at timing T2 may or may not depend on the currently set volume value.
If it does not depend on the currently set volume value, it may be output at the maximum volume value.
If it depends on the currently set volume value, the player can hear a notification encouraging him or her to hit left at the volume value he or she desires, allowing the player to play comfortably.
If the volume is output at the maximum volume value, for example, without depending on the currently set volume value, the player can be sure that he or she will be hitting the ball from the left even if left hit information is not displayed.

Note that in FIG. 39, at timing T2, only audio notification is given by the speaker 10, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the light-emitting device 9 may also be used to suggest that the player will hit with the left hand. Specifically, at timing T2, the light-emitting device 9 may be made to flash at high speed to suggest that the player will hit with the left hand, or only the left side of the light-emitting device 9 may be made to emit light to suggest that the player will hit with the left hand.

Note that in Figure 39, an example is given of power restoration (when a power restoration command is received), but the same can be applied when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

Note that in FIG. 39, the description is based on the assumption that a right hit is made while the power supply is being restored in the normal game mode, but this is not limited to the above. For example, irregular cases may be assumed in which a game ball is stuck on the right side of the game area 7 and above the gate member 20 (for example, a game ball is stuck between the center device and the game pin), and the ball accidentally stops being stuck while the power supply is being restored in the normal game mode and passes through the gate member 20.

In this embodiment, a right-hit indicator 29c is provided, but a left-hit indicator is not provided, so in the case of Figure 39 (timing T2), there is no way to visually confirm that the state is for left-hitting.
Therefore, the above-mentioned left-hand hit indicator may be provided and the left-hand hit indicator may be turned on at timing T2.
As a result, even if the left-hand hit information (left-hand hit image 26lh) cannot be seen on the image display device 26, it is possible to visually confirm that the left-hand hit is being performed on a separate left-hand hit display.

In the example of Fig. 39, when the normal symbol hit determination process performed by passing the game ball through the gate member 20 results in a normal symbol hit, and the game ball enters the second start hole 22, the icon (the relevant variable icon, the reserved icon) is not displayed, and a symbol change game is executed by having the game ball enter the second start hole 22. As a result, the symbol change game is executed even though the icon is not displayed, which can give the player a sense of incongruity and indirectly suggest that the game is not being played optimally for the player.
In addition, in the example of Figure 39, the normal symbol hit determination process is performed by passing the gaming ball through the gate member 20, but this is not limited to the above, and the normal symbol hit determination process itself may not be performed, or the normal symbol hit determination process may be performed but the normal symbol miss may be determined as "256/256".

(A diagram for explaining a second example (another example) of a notification mode)
Next, a second example (another example) of the notification mode will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Note that in Fig. 40, the description of the points in common with Fig. 39 will be omitted and the description will focus on the points of difference.

Fig. 40 shows another example of Fig. 39. That is, Fig. 40 assumes a case where a start hole related subcommand (particularly, a subcommand indicating that a game ball has entered the first start hole 21) is received during power restoration in the time-saving game state A or B (or in the probability variation game state) (that is, a case where a left hit is performed in the time-saving game state A or B).
Specifically, until timing T1, the power is OFF, the image display device 26 is OFF (not displayed) as shown by the diagonal lines, and the right-hit lamp (right-hit display 29c) is also turned off as shown by the diagonal lines.
Then, when the power is turned ON at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts the recovery process, the image display device 26 displays "Screen display recovering", and the right hit lamp (right hit display 29c) lights up.
At this time, the screen display recovery information is drawn on layer 1, and the information is not drawn on layer 6.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are composited together, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a subcommand related to the starting hole. In this case, right-hit information is drawn in layer 6, and a sound encouraging the player to make a right hit is output from the speaker 10. However, since the screen display return information is still drawn in layer 1, although the right-hit information is drawn, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, it is not visible due to the display content of layer 1, so the speaker 10 outputs a sound saying "Please hit right," and the right-hit lamp (right-hit indicator 29c) lights up to notify the player.

Then, at timing T3, when the return condition is satisfied, the display during the screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-symbols, etc. are visibly displayed. The return condition being satisfied here may be when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined command (e.g., a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) has been received.
Furthermore, when the image display device 26 returns to normal, right hit information (right hit image 26rh) is visibly displayed.
At this time, layer 1 is not yet rendered and nothing is displayed (drawn), and the display contents of layer 2 and onwards can be viewed when the layers are composited and displayed on the image display device 26. Therefore, the right hit information (right hit image 26rh) is visible.
In this way, even if a starting hole-related sub-command (especially a sub-command indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 21) is received during power restoration when the game state is in a time-saving game state (or a special chance game state), the same effect as that described in Figure 39 is achieved.

In addition, while the power is being restored, the initial operation of the movable body 28 is performed as described above, making it difficult to see the display content of the image display device 26. However, the right hit lamp (right hit display 29c) is not affected by the initial operation, so the player can understand the game that should be played (hitting left) by checking the right hit lamp (right hit display 29c).

The volume value of the message "Please hit right" output from the speaker 10 at timing T2 may or may not depend on the currently set volume value.
If it does not depend on the currently set volume value, it may be output at the maximum volume value.
If it depends on the currently set volume value, the player can hear a notification encouraging him or her to hit the right button at the volume value he or she desires, allowing the player to play comfortably.
If the output is made at the maximum volume value, for example, without depending on the currently set volume value, the player can be sure to recognize that he or she will be making a right hit even if right hit information (right hit image 26rh) is not displayed.

In FIG. 40, at timing T2, only audio notification is given by the speaker 10, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the light-emitting device 9 may also be used to suggest that a right-handed hit will be made. Specifically, at timing T2, the light-emitting device 9 may be made to flash at high speed to suggest that a right-handed hit will be made, or only the right side of the light-emitting device 9 may be made to emit light to suggest that a right-handed hit will be made.

Note that in Figure 40, an example is given of power restoration (when a power restoration command is received), but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

Note that in FIG. 40, the description is based on the assumption that a left hit is made while the power is being restored in the time-saving play state, but this is not limited to the above case. For example, an irregular case may be assumed in which the game ball is stuck on the left side of the play area 7 and above the first start hole 21 (for example, the game ball is stuck between the center device and the game pin), and the ball accidentally stops being stuck while the power is being restored in the time-saving play state and passes through the first start hole 21.

In the example of Fig. 40, when a game ball enters the first start hole 21, the icon (the change icon, the reserved icon) is not displayed, and a pattern change game is executed by having the game ball enter the first start hole 21. This causes the pattern change game to be executed even though the icon is not displayed, which can give the player a sense of incongruity and indirectly suggests that the game is not being played optimally for the player.
In the example of Figure 40, the special symbol hit determination process is performed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, but this is not limited to the above, and the special symbol hit determination process itself may not be performed, or the special symbol hit determination process may be performed but ``319/319'' may result in a miss.

(A diagram for explaining a third example of a notification mode)
Next, a third example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 41 illustrates a case where a player adjusts the volume while waiting for customers in a normal gaming state.
Specifically, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives a volume/light value related sub-command (in the example of Figure 41, a sub-command related to the volume value) at timing T1, it draws a speaker icon image 26sp in layer 3 and volume value information corresponding to the current volume value (a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 3).
In addition, the adjustment sound "Mi♪" corresponding to the volume value 3 is output from the speaker 10.
41, the volume value is 3 until timing T1, and the operation at timing T1 indicates the initial operation of the cross key button 16. In other words, the volume value remains 3 even after timing T1.

Then, at timing T2, when a volume value/light value related sub-command (in the example of Figure 41, a volume value change (decrease) sub-command) is received, a speaker icon image 26sp and volume value information corresponding to the current volume value (a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) are drawn in layer 3.
In addition, the adjustment sound "Re♪" corresponding to the volume value 2 is output from the speaker 10.
Incidentally, timing T2 is the second operation of the cross key button 16 following the initial operation at timing T1, so the volume value becomes 2, which is a decrease by one level.
This type of behavior occurs when a player adjusts the volume while waiting for customers in a normal gaming state.

(A diagram for explaining a fourth example of a notification mode)
Next, a fourth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 42 assumes that the player adjusts the volume (or the light intensity) while the power is being restored (when the power restoration command is received).
Specifically, the power supply is OFF until timing T1, and the image display device 26 is also OFF (not displayed) as indicated by the diagonal lines.
When the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts a recovery process, and the image display device 26 displays "screen display recovering."
At this time, the screen display recovery information is drawn on layer 1, and the information is not drawn on layer 3.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are composited together, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a subcommand related to the volume value/light amount value (a subcommand related to the volume value in the example of FIG. 42). In this case, the speaker icon image 26sp and volume value information corresponding to the current volume value (a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 3) are drawn in layer 3.
In addition, the adjustment sound "Mi♪" corresponding to the volume value 3 is output from the speaker 10.
However, since the screen display return information is still being drawn in layer 1, volume value information (a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 3) is drawn, but when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, it is made invisible due to the display content of layer 1, and only the adjustment sound "Mi ♪" is announced by the speaker 10.
42, the volume value is 3 until timing T1, and the operation at timing T1 indicates the initial operation of the cross key button 16. In other words, the volume value remains 3 even after timing T1.

Then, at timing T3, when a volume value/light value related sub-command (in the example of Figure 42, a volume value change (decrease) sub-command) is received, a speaker icon image 26sp and volume value information corresponding to the current volume value (a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) are drawn in layer 3.
In addition, the adjustment sound "Re ♪" corresponding to the volume value 2 is output from the speaker 10.
However, since the screen display return information is still being drawn in layer 1, volume value information (a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) is drawn, but when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, it is made invisible due to the display content of layer 1, and only the adjustment sound "Re ♪" is announced by the speaker 10.
Incidentally, timing T3 is the second operation of the cross key button 16 following the initial operation at timing T1, so the volume value is changed to volume value 2, decreasing the volume value by one level. That is, although the level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2 is not visible, the process of changing the volume value from 3 to volume value 2 is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from having to operate the cross key button 16 again after the return condition is met.

Then, at timing T4, when the return condition is satisfied, the display during the screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-symbols, etc. are visibly displayed. The return condition being satisfied here may be when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined command (for example, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a demo command, etc.) has been received.
Furthermore, when the image display device 26 returns to normal, the volume value information (a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) is visibly displayed. Note that the adjustment sound "Re♪" from the speaker 10 is a single sound and is therefore not output at timing T4.
At this time, layer 1 is undrawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), and the display contents of layer 2 and onwards are visible when the layers are composited and displayed on the image display device 26. Therefore, the volume value information (a level gauge image corresponding to volume value 2) is visible.

In this way, when the volume is adjusted while the power is restored, the image display device 26 performs the adjustment only while the screen display is restored, and the notification of the volume adjustment is performed only by the speaker 10 .
As a result, for example, an administrator can visually check the image display device 26 to know that the screen display is being restored when power is restored, and a player can understand that volume adjustment is being performed by listening to the adjustment sound from the speaker 10 even though volume value information is not displayed.
Also, even when the power is restored and the screen display is showing that display is returning, if the volume is adjusted, the volume value is changed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having to operate the cross key button 16 again after the return condition is established.
Furthermore, as shown at timings T2 and T3, even if the screen display is being restored and the volume value information is not visible, the volume value information corresponding to the current volume value is drawn. Layers 1 to 7 are then composited and displayed.
This makes it possible to standardize the process of synthesizing and displaying layers 1 to 7 regardless of whether the power supply has been restored or not. For example, it is possible to eliminate the need for a process specific to when the power supply is restored, such as not drawing volume value information in layer 3 when a volume value/light amount value subcommand is received but the power supply is being restored, and it is possible to uniformly draw volume value information in layer 3 when a volume value/light amount value subcommand is received.

Note that in Figure 42, an example is given of power restoration (when a power restoration command is received), but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

In the example of Fig. 42, if a volume adjustment is performed while "screen display returning" is being displayed, an adjustment sound corresponding to the current volume value or the adjusted volume value is output, but for example, if an operation to decrease the volume value (operation of the left direction button of the cross key button 16) is performed when the current volume value is the minimum volume value level 1, the adjustment sound "Do" may be output, or no sound may be output without outputting the adjustment sound "Do". Similarly, if an operation to increase the volume value (operation of the right direction button of the cross key button 16) is performed when the current volume value is the maximum volume value level 5, the adjustment sound "So" may be output, or no sound may be output without outputting the adjustment sound "So".
As a result, when an adjustment sound is output, the same sound (do♪ or sol♪) is output continuously, so that even if the level gauge image corresponding to the current volume value is not visible, the user can recognize that the volume value cannot be adjusted any further.
Also, even when the adjustment sound is not output, for example, when the left direction button of the cross key button 16 is operated continuously, the adjustment sound is suddenly not output and it becomes silent, so that the user can recognize that the volume value cannot be adjusted any further.

(A diagram for explaining a fifth example of a notification mode)
Next, a fifth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 43 assumes a case where a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 during execution of a pattern variation game in a normal gaming state.
Specifically, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives a start hole-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 43, a subcommand related to a ball entering the first start hole 21) at timing T1, it draws number reservation information and icon information in layer 2. Also, the winning sound "Piron ♪" is output from the speaker 10, indicating that a game ball has entered the first start hole 21 and a normal reservation icon has been displayed in the first start hole first reserved ball image display area 26g.
In FIG. 43, layers 1 to 7 are always composited and displayed both before and after timing T1.
In this manner, a notification is given when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 during execution of a pattern variation game in a normal game state.

(A diagram for explaining a sixth example of a notification mode)
Next, a sixth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 44 assumes that a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 while power is being restored in the normal game mode (when a power restoration command is received).
Specifically, until timing T1, the power supply is OFF, and the image display device 26 is also OFF (not displayed) as indicated by the diagonal lines.
When the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts a recovery process, and the image display device 26 displays "screen display recovering."
At this time, in layer 1, information indicating that the screen display is returning is drawn, and in layer 2, only the fact that the number reservation information relating to the number reservation is 0 is drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are composited together, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.
Although number reservation information is drawn in layer 2, when the layers are composited and displayed on the image display device 26, it is rendered invisible by the display contents of layer 1.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a starting hole-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 44, a subcommand related to entering the first starting hole 21). In this case, the number reservation information "0" related to the number reservation in layer 2 and the variable icon to be displayed in the variable icon display area 26o are drawn.
In addition, the winning sound "Piron ♪" is output from the speaker 10 to indicate that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 21 and the normal variable icon has been displayed in the variable icon display area 26o.
However, since the screen display return information continues to be drawn in layer 1, the number hold information "0" relating to the number hold and the variable icon to be displayed in the variable icon display area 26o are drawn, but when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, they are made invisible due to the display content of layer 1, and only the winning sound "Piron ♪" is announced by the speaker 10.

Then, at timing T3, when the return condition is satisfied, the display during the screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-symbols, etc. are visibly displayed. The return condition being satisfied here may be when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined command (e.g., a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) has been received.
Furthermore, when the image display device 26 returns to normal, the number reservation and the variable icon are visibly displayed, and the background music that is output during the variable display is being output.
At this time, layer 1 is not yet drawn and nothing is displayed (drawn), and the display contents of layer 2 and after can be viewed when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26. Therefore, the reserved numbers and the corresponding variable icons can be viewed.

In this way, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 while power is being restored (when a power restoration command is received), the image display device 26 only displays the screen while it is being restored, and the notification of the ball entering the hole is made only by the speaker 10.
As a result, for example, an administrator can visually check the image display device 26 to know that the screen display is returning when power is restored, and a player can understand that the game ball has entered the starting hole by listening to the winning sound from the speaker 10, even if number reserve information or icon information is not displayed.
Also, as shown at timing T2, even if the screen display is being restored and the number reservation information and icon information are not visible, the number reservation information and icon information are drawn. Then, layers 1 to 7 are composited and displayed.
This allows for uniform processing, such as composite display of layers 1 to 7, regardless of whether power has been restored or not. For example, processing specific to when power is restored, such as not drawing number reservation information or icon information in layer 2 when a start port related subcommand is received but power is being restored, can be eliminated, and processing can be uniformly set to draw number reservation information and icon information in layer 2 when a start port related subcommand is received.

Note that in Figure 44, an example is given of power restoration (when a power restoration command is received), but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

Note that when the power is being restored in normal game mode (when the power restoration command is received), if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 but the ball has already been stored up to the above-mentioned "fourth memory area," the speaker 10 will not play a winning sound. This allows the player to recognize that the ball entered the first starting hole 21 in a situation where the ball has already been stored up to the "fourth memory area."

(A diagram for explaining a sixth example (another example) of a notification mode)
Next, a sixth example (another example) of the notification mode will be described with reference to Fig. 45. In Fig. 45, the description of the points in common with Fig. 44 will be omitted and the description will focus on the points of difference.

Figure 45 differs from Figure 44 in that the display modes of the main hold display and the sub hold display have been added.
Specifically, until timing T2, the hold number counter is at 3, and the main hold display and sub hold display show "◎○".
Then, at timing T2, when a start port-related sub-command (in the example of Figure 45, a sub-command related to entering the first start port 21) is received, the hold number counter becomes 4, and the main hold display and sub hold display show "◎◎".
After that, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T3, the display during the screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-symbols, etc. are visibly displayed. The return condition being satisfied here may be when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined command (for example, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) has been received.
In other words, at timing T2, the number hold information and icon information are not visible, but the winning sound announced by the speaker 10 can be heard, and the winning announcement made by updating the display of the main hold display and the sub hold display can be seen.
This means that even if the number reserve information or icon information is not visible, the winning combination can be visually confirmed on the main reserve display and the sub reserve display.
Also, while the power is being restored, the initial operation of the movable body 28 is performed as described above, making it difficult to see the display content of the image display device 26; however, since the main hold display and the sub hold display are not affected by the initial operation, it is possible to see (confirm) the winning by checking the main hold display and the sub hold display.

Note that in Figure 45, an example is given of power restoration (when a power restoration command is received), but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(A diagram for explaining a seventh example of a notification mode)
Next, a seventh example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the display mode of the icon in the above-mentioned reserved advance reading performance, and the light emission mode of the starting port light emitting device 21b linked to the display mode of the icon.
Specifically, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a starting hole-related sub-command at timing T1 (in the example of Figure 46, a sub-command relating to the ball entering the first starting hole 21), and if the starting hole-related sub-command indicates a reserve read-ahead performance (blue), it refers to the change scenario and draws number reserve information and icon information (blue) in layer 2.
Then, by combining and displaying layers 1 to 7, a blue "△" indicating a reserved ball icon is displayed in the first starting hole fourth reserved ball image display area 26j.
In addition, when the ball enters the first starting hole 21, the speaker 10 emits a winning sound "Plon♪" to notify that a blue reserved icon has been displayed.
In addition, the light emission driving CPU 208 receives a starting hole related sub-command (in the example of Figure 46, a sub-command related to the ball entering the first starting hole 21) at timing T1, and if the starting hole related sub-command indicates a pending pre-reading performance (blue), it causes the starting hole light emitting device 21b to emit blue light.
In this way, when the ball enters the first starting hole 21, a blue hold icon is displayed, and in conjunction with this, a notification is given that the starting hole light-emitting device 21b has emitted blue light.

Then, when the image/sound CPU 204 receives a change pattern related sub-command at timing T2, it refers to the change scenario (note that in Figure 46, this is a scenario in which the color changes from blue to yellow) and draws number reservation information and icon information (yellow) in layer 2.
Then, by combining and displaying layers 1 to 7, a yellow "☆" indicating a reserved ball icon is displayed in the first starting hole third reserved ball image display area 26i.
In addition, the speaker 10 outputs a changed sound "keen" to notify that the hold icon has been updated to a yellow one.
Furthermore, when the light emission driving CPU 208 receives a variation pattern related sub-command at timing T2, it causes the starting port light emitting device 21b to emit light in yellow.
In this way, when the next symbol variation game is executed, a yellow hold icon is displayed, and in conjunction with this, it is notified that the starting port light emitting device 21b has emitted yellow light.

(FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an eighth example of a notification mode)
Next, an eighth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.
In addition, Fig. 47 shows an example in which the reserved reading performance described in Fig. 46 starts from the ball entering when the power is restored. Therefore, the explanation of the parts common to Fig. 46 will be omitted and the explanation will focus on the differences.

Specifically, the starting hole light emitting device 21b is off until timing T2, and when timing T2 is reached, a starting hole related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 47, a subcommand related to entering the first starting hole 21) is received, and if the starting hole related subcommand indicates a reserved reading performance (blue), the number reserved information and icon information (blue) are drawn in layer 2 by referring to the change scenario. However, since the screen display return information has been drawn in layer 1 since timing T1, although the number reserved information and icon information (blue) are drawn, they are not visible due to the display content of layer 1 when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26.
Also, at timing T2, the speaker 10 outputs the winning sound "Plon♪" to indicate that a blue hold icon has been displayed (actually invisible) due to the ball entering the first starting hole 21.
Also, at timing T2, the starting port light-emitting device 21b emits light in blue.

Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T3, the display during the screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-symbols, etc. are visibly displayed. The return condition being satisfied here may be when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined command (e.g., a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) has been received.
At this time, since layer 1 is not yet drawn, the variable icon is visibly displayed as a blue "△" in the variable icon display area 26o.
In this way, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 during power restoration (when a power restoration command is received) and the reserved ball read-ahead performance is initiated, the image display device 26 only performs the process while the screen display is restored, and notification related to the reserved ball read-ahead performance is made by the speaker 10 and the starting hole light-emitting device 21b.
As a result, for example, the administrator can see that the screen display is returning when power is restored by visually checking the image display device 26, and the player can understand that the reserve read-ahead performance has started by listening to the winning sound from the speaker 10 and visually checking the light-emitting mode of the start port light-emitting device 21b, even if no number reserve information or icon information is displayed.
Also, as shown at timing T2, even if the screen display is being restored and the reserved number information and icon information are not visible, the reserved number information and icon information are drawn. Then, layers 1 to 7 are composited and displayed.
This allows for uniform processing, such as composite display of layers 1 to 7, regardless of whether power has been restored or not. For example, processing specific to when power is restored, such as not drawing number reservation information or icon information in layer 2 when a start port related subcommand is received but power is being restored, can be eliminated, and processing can be uniformly set to draw number reservation information and icon information in layer 2 when a start port related subcommand is received.

In addition, while the power supply is being restored, the initial operation of the movable body 28 is performed as described above, making it difficult to see the display content of the image display device 26. However, the start port light-emitting device 21b is not affected by the initial operation, so it is possible to visually confirm (confirm) that the reserved pre-reading performance has started by checking the start port light-emitting device 21b.

Note that in Figure 47, an example is given of power restoration (when a power restoration command is received), but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(FIG. 13 illustrates a ninth example of a notification mode)
Next, a ninth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 48 assumes the case where a starting hole-related subcommand (particularly a subcommand indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 21) is received during power restoration in the time-saving play state (or in the guaranteed bonus play state) (i.e., a left-handed shot is performed in the time-saving play state), and is a diagram explaining the characteristics of the light emission mode of the starting hole light-emitting device 21b in that case.

Specifically, until timing T1, the power supply is OFF, and the image display device 26 is also OFF (not displayed) as indicated by the diagonal lines.
When the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts a recovery process, and the image display device 26 displays "screen display recovering."
At this time, in layer 1, information indicating that the screen display is returning is drawn, and in layer 2, only the fact that the number reservation information relating to the number reservation is 0 is drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are composited together, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.
Although number reservation information is drawn in layer 2, when the layers are composited and displayed on the image display device 26, it is rendered invisible by the display contents of layer 1.
In addition, the starting port light-emitting device 21b and the speaker lamp 10a are turned off, and the right-hit lamp (right-hit indicator 29c), which is not shown in the figure, is turned on.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a starting hole-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 48, a subcommand related to a ball entering the first starting hole 21), and draws number reserve information in layer 2 and right hit information (right hit image 26rh) in layer 6 (not shown). However, since the screen display return information has been drawn in layer 1 since timing T1, although the number reserve information and right hit information are drawn, they are not visible due to the display content of layer 1 when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26.

At timing T2, the starting hole light emitting device 21b and the speaker lamp 10a are turned off. Note that the term "turned off" here means that the starting hole light emitting device 21b and the speaker lamp 10a remain turned off even though a game ball has entered the first starting hole 21.
For example, if the starting hole light emitting device 21b is a game ball that enters the first starting hole 21, it can emit light in any of the colors shown in Figure 30. However, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 while the power is being restored during the time-saving game mode, it will not emit light in any of the colors shown in Figure 30.
Specifically, even if it is just a winning announcement of "white" as shown in Figure 30 without any reserve read-ahead effect, it will not light up, and even if the result of the special pattern hit determination process performed when the ball enters the jackpot is a win, it will not light up with a "rainbow" light.
Also, in the case of the speaker lamp 10a, if a game ball enters the first start hole 21 and wins the execution of the winning flash performance, it can emit light in any of the colors shown in the winning flash performance, but if a game ball enters the first start hole 21 during power restoration in the time-saving game state, it is set not to emit light in any of the colors. Note that not emitting light in any of the colors may mean that the drawing for the winning flash performance execution itself is not performed, or it may mean that the drawing for the winning flash performance execution is performed and then the color is not emitted.
By configuring it in this manner, for example, when a game ball is inserted into the first starting hole 21 in a normal game state, the starting hole light-emitting device 21b will emit light in one of the colors shown in Figure 30. However, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 while the power is restored in the time-saving game state (A, B), it will not emit light of any color (it will not even emit white light), which gives the player a sense of discomfort and indirectly informs him or her that the game is not being played in an optimal manner (the first starting hole 21 is not the starting hole into which the ball should be inserted).
In addition, the speaker lamp 10a is illuminated even when the game is not optimal for the player (the first starting hole 21 is not the starting hole into which the ball should be placed), which can prevent the player from mistaking that placing the game ball in the first starting hole 21 is the optimal game.

The example in Figure 48 is a case where a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 while power is being restored in the time-saving game mode. However, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 while power is being restored in the normal game mode, as described in Figure 47, it is possible to light up the starting hole light-emitting device 21b and also the speaker lamp 10a.

Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T3, the display during the screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-symbols, etc. are visibly displayed. The return condition being satisfied here may be when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined command (e.g., a symbol stop command, a demo command, etc.) has been received.
Furthermore, when the image display device 26 returns to normal, the number reservation is visibly displayed, and the background music that is output during the varying display is output.
At this time, layer 1 is not yet rendered and nothing is displayed (drawn), and when the layers are composited and displayed on the image display device 26, the display contents of layer 2 and onwards are made visible. Therefore, the reserved numbers are visible.
As shown in Fig. 48, when an event occurs in which a game ball is inserted into the first starting hole 21 while the power supply is restored in the time-saving game state, the icon corresponding to the ball insertion (the variable icon, the reserved icon) is not displayed. That is, an event occurs in which the icon information is not drawn in layer 2 at timing T2, and the variable icon is not displayed on the image display device 26 at timing T3, and the symbol variable game is being executed even though the variable icon is not displayed.

Note that in Figure 48, an example is given of power restoration (when a power restoration command is received), but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(A diagram for explaining a ninth example (another example) of a notification mode)
Next, a ninth example (another example) of the notification mode will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Note that in Fig. 49, the description of the points common to Fig. 48 will be omitted and the description will focus on the points different from Fig. 48.

49 assumes a case where a game ball is inserted into the second starting hole 22 during power restoration in a normal game state. In this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 5 and 6, a normal winning occurs even in a normal game state, and the opening and closing member of the second starting hole 22 may be opened, so it is possible to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 22.
On the other hand, when the system is configured so that normal winning is not achieved in the normal game state as described above, a case in which a game ball enters the second starting hole 22 in the normal game state is anticipated in which, for example, in the time-saving game state (A, B), the opening and closing member of the second starting hole 22 pinches the game ball attempting to enter the second starting hole 22 during the closing operation, the game state transitions to the normal game state in that state, and the pinching is released, and the game ball attempting to enter the second starting hole 22 actually enters the second starting hole 22.

Specifically, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a starting hole-related subcommand (in the example of FIG. 49, a subcommand related to a ball entering the second starting hole 22), and draws number reserve information in layer 2 and left hit information (left hit image 26lh) in layer 6 (not shown). However, since screen display return information has been drawn in layer 1 since timing T1, although the number reserve information and left hit information are drawn, they are not visible due to the display content of layer 1 when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26.

In addition, at timing T2, the starting hole light emitting device 21b and the speaker lamp 10a are turned off. In other words, even if a game ball enters the second starting hole 22 during power restoration in a normal game state, the starting hole light emitting device 21b and the speaker lamp 10a will not emit light.
For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process that is performed when the ball enters the hole is a hit, the starting hole light emitting device 21b will not light up with a rainbow.
In this way, even if a game ball is inserted into the second starting hole 22 while power is being restored in a normal game state, the player can be indirectly notified that the game is not being played in an optimal manner (the second starting hole 22 is not the starting hole into which the ball should be inserted).

When the return condition is met at timing T3, the display during screen display return ends, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-patterns, etc. are visibly displayed. The return condition being met here may be when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined command (e.g., a pattern stop command, a demo command, etc.) has been received.

Note that in Figure 49, an example is given of power restoration (when a power restoration command is received), but the same can be applied when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

(A diagram for explaining a tenth example of a notification mode)
Next, a tenth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 50 assumes that an error occurs during power restoration.
Specifically, until timing T1, the power supply is OFF, and the image display device 26 is also OFF (not displayed) as indicated by the diagonal lines.
When the power is turned on at timing T1, the main CPU 101 starts a recovery process, and the image display device 26 displays "screen display recovering."
At this time, in layer 1, information indicating that the screen display is being restored is drawn.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are composited together, and the above-mentioned "screen display returning" is displayed.

Then, at timing T2, the image/sound CPU 204 receives an error-related subcommand (a subcommand relating to a radio wave error in the example of FIG. 50). In this case, information indicating that the screen display is returning and error information relating to the radio wave error are drawn in layer 1.
Then, layers 1 to 7 are combined, and the image display device 26 displays a message indicating that the screen display is being restored and a radio wave error 26er notifying the occurrence of a radio wave error.
Additionally, a warning sound and a voice informing of a radio wave error are output from the speaker 10.

Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T3, the display during the screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the sub-symbols, etc. are visibly displayed. The return condition being satisfied here may be when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined command (for example, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a demo command, etc.) has been received.
Note that, when the recovery condition is satisfied, the display during the screen display recovery is terminated, but since it is assumed that the radio wave error has not yet been resolved, error information relating to the radio wave error continues to be drawn in layer 1, and a radio wave error 26er is displayed on the image display device 26. In addition, a warning sound and a voice announcing the radio wave error are output from the speaker 10.
In this way, if an error occurs during power restoration, information about the error is displayed along with the display while the screen display is being restored. Additionally, a warning sound and a voice announcing the radio wave error are output from the speaker 10. This allows the administrator to quickly understand that an error has occurred during power restoration.

Note that in Figure 50, an example is given of power restoration (when a power restoration command is received), but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

In addition, in FIG. 50, the occurrence of a radio wave error is described as an example, but this is not limiting and a similar notification may be issued for other errors.

(FIG. 11 illustrates an eleventh example of a notification mode)
Next, an eleventh example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 51 assumes the case where a power outage occurs during a winning game and then power is restored, and in particular shows the features related to the notification mode when an over-winning occurs in the large winning port 24 while power is restored.
Specifically, until timing T1, the power is ON and a winning game is being played. At this time, layer 1 is undrawn, right hit information (right hit image 26rh) is drawn in layer 6, and jackpot information (e.g., game medium acquisition image 26t acquired in a winning game) is drawn in layer 7. Layers 1 to 7 are then composited and displayed to display an image during the winning game.

Then, at timing T1, the power is turned off (a power interruption occurs), and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by the diagonal lines.
Thereafter, when the power is turned ON at timing T2, the main CPU 101 starts a recovery process, and the image display device 26 displays the message "Screen display is recovering. Please continue playing."
At this time, screen display restoration information is drawn on layer 1, right hit information (right hit image 26rh) is drawn on layer 6, and jackpot information is drawn on layer 7. However, since screen display restoration information is drawn on layer 1, although right hit information (right hit image 26rh) and jackpot information are drawn, they are not visible due to the display content of layer 1 when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26.
In addition, after an interrupt is permitted between timing T2 and timing T3, the big prize opening 24 is opened.

Then, at timing T3, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a special prize opening related sub-command (in the example of FIG. 51, a sub-command related to a special prize opening ball entry detection signal). Note that the special prize opening related sub-command corresponds to the above-mentioned over prize.
At this time, a "pirorin" sound is output from the speaker 10, notifying that an over-winning has occurred at the large winning port 24.
The number of winning balls obtained by the over-winning is added to the game medium acquisition image 26t and drawn in layer 7. For example, if the game medium acquisition image 26t up until timing T2 is "488", a game medium acquisition image 26t of "500" is drawn in layer 7. However, since the screen display return information is drawn in layer 1, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, it is not visible due to the display content of layer 1.
Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T4, the display during the screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the image during the winning game is visibly displayed. The return condition being satisfied here may be when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined command (for example, a large prize opening open command transmitted when the large prize opening is opened, a large prize opening close command transmitted when the large prize opening is closed, etc., not shown) has been received.
When the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the image during the winning game is visibly displayed, the image during the winning game (e.g., the game medium acquisition image 26t after addition) is again visibly displayed.

In this way, when an over-winning occurs at the big winning port 24 during the power restoration of a winning game, the image display device 26 displays information indicating that the screen display is being restored, and the over-winning is notified only by the speaker 10.
As a result, for example, the administrator can see that the screen display is returning when power is restored by visually checking the image display device 26, and although the player cannot visually see the number of winning balls obtained through an over win being added to the game medium acquisition image 26t, he or she can recognize that an over win has occurred by listening to the sound output from the speaker 10 to notify the player that an over win has occurred.

Also, as shown at timing T3, even when the screen display is being restored and the jackpot information (particularly the game medium acquisition image 26t) is not visible, the number of prize balls obtained by over-winning is added to the game medium acquisition image 26t and drawn in layer 7. Then, layers 1 to 7 are composited and displayed.
This allows a uniform process to be used to display layers 1 to 7 in a composite manner regardless of whether the power supply has been restored or not. For example, a process specific to when the power supply is restored is not required, such as when a subcommand related to a ball-entry detection signal is received but the power supply is being restored, so that the jackpot information (particularly, the game medium acquisition image 26t) is not drawn in layer 7. Instead, a process can be used in which the jackpot information (particularly, the game medium acquisition image 26t) is drawn in layer 7 when a subcommand related to a ball-entry detection signal is received.

Note that in Figure 51, an example is given of power restoration (when a power restoration command is received), but the same applies when power is turned on (when a power-on command is received).

The over-winning event may be notified not only by the speaker 10 but also by illuminating the light-emitting device 9. For example, when an over-winning event occurs, the light may be illuminated in a color different from the previous color.

(Drawing for explaining a twelfth example of a notification mode)
Next, a twelfth example of the notification mode will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 52 assumes the case where a power outage occurs during a winning game and then power is restored, and in particular shows the features related to the notification mode when a ball enters the normal winning port 23 while power is restored.
Specifically, until timing T1, the power is ON and a winning game is being played. At this time, layer 1 is undrawn, layer 4 is undrawn, right hit information (right hit image 26rh) is drawn in layer 6, and jackpot information (e.g., game medium acquisition image 26t acquired in a winning game) is drawn in layer 7. Layers 1 to 7 are then composited and displayed to display an image during the winning game.

Then, at timing T1, the power is turned off (a power interruption occurs), and the image display device 26 is also turned off (not displayed) as indicated by the diagonal lines.
Thereafter, when the power is turned ON at timing T2, the main CPU 101 starts a recovery process, and the image display device 26 displays the message "Screen display is recovering. Please continue playing."
At this time, the screen display restoration information is drawn in layer 1, the layer 4 is not yet drawn, the right hit information (right hit image 26rh) is drawn in layer 6, and the jackpot information is drawn in layer 7. However, since the screen display restoration information is drawn in layer 1, although the right hit information (right hit image 26rh) and the jackpot information are drawn, they are not visible due to the display content of layer 1 when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26.

Then, at timing T3, the image/sound CPU 204 receives a subcommand related to the normal winning hole (in the example of FIG. 52, a subcommand related to the normal winning hole ball entry detection signal). At this time, the speaker 10 outputs a "charrin" sound, notifying that a game ball has entered the normal winning hole 23.
The number of winning balls obtained by the balls entering the normal winning port is added to the game medium acquisition image 26t and is drawn in layer 7. Also, winning notification information (ball entry notification image 26sk) for the normal winning port is drawn in layer 4. However, since screen display return information is drawn in layer 1, when the layers are combined and displayed on the image display device 26, it is not visible due to the display content of layer 1.

Then, when the return condition is satisfied at timing T4, the display during the screen display return is terminated, and the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the image during the winning game is visibly displayed. The return condition being satisfied here may be when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined command (for example, a large prize opening open command transmitted when the large prize opening is opened, a large prize opening close command transmitted when the large prize opening is closed, etc., not shown) has been received.
When the image display device 26 returns to a state in which the image during the winning game is visibly displayed, the image during the winning game (for example, the game medium acquisition image 26t after the addition) is displayed again.
Also, at timing T4, a subcommand related to the normal winning port ball entry detection signal is received again, and winning notification information (ball entry notification image 26sk) for the normal winning port is drawn on layer 4. As a result, a ball entry notification image 26sk such as "+1" that notifies that one game ball has entered the normal winning port 23 is visibly displayed on the image display device 26. In addition, a "charrin" sound is output from the speaker 10, notifying that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 23.

In this way, when a ball enters the normal winning hole 23 during the power restoration of a winning game, the image display device 26 displays information indicating that the screen display is being restored, and the announcement of the ball entering the normal winning hole 23 is made only by the speaker 10.
As a result, for example, the administrator can see that the screen display is returning when the power is restored by looking at the image display device 26, and although the player cannot see the ball entry notification image 26sk when a ball enters the normal entry port 23, he can recognize that a ball has entered the normal entry port 23 by listening to the sound output from the speaker 10 notifying that a ball has entered.

Also, as shown at timing T3, even when the screen display is being restored and the jackpot information (particularly, the ball-striking notification image 26sk) is not visible, it is drawn in layer 4. Then, layers 1 to 7 are composited and displayed.
This allows for uniform processing, such as displaying layers 1 to 7 by combining them, regardless of whether the power supply is restored or not. For example, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing specific to when the power supply is restored, such as not drawing jackpot information (particularly, the ball entry notification image 26sk) in layer 4 when a subcommand related to a normal winning hole ball entry detection signal is received but the power supply is being restored, and it is possible to uniformly perform processing such as drawing jackpot information (particularly, the ball entry notification image 26sk) in layer 4 when a subcommand related to a normal winning hole ball entry detection signal is received.

Next, we will explain the characteristics of time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B using Figures 53 to 71. As mentioned above, in the figures, time-saving game state A is described as opportunity 1, and time-saving game state B is described as opportunity 2.

(Time chart 1 showing the characteristics of trigger 1 and trigger 2)
FIG. 53 shows the display contents of the image display device 26 at the time of entering the time-shortened gaming state at opportunity 1 and opportunity 2, and at the time of ending the time-shortened gaming state.
First, at timing (a) of trigger 1, the special pattern C is displayed as confirmed and the winning game (including the opening) starts, and the image display device 26 displays the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c as "444", together with a text image such as "Jackpot!!"

Then, after displaying "444" and "Jackpot!!" for a predetermined period of time, the display ends and an "arrow image" and a text image saying "Aim right!" are displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 7b. The "arrow image" and the text image saying "Aim right!" displayed here are referred to as the right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p. The right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p is displayed, for example, based on the reception of an opening command for a winning game (see FIG. 20).

Then, after the right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p is displayed for a predetermined time, the display ends and an image corresponding to the first round of the winning game is displayed. When the first round starts, the right-hit promotion notification image 26q is displayed. After that, images corresponding to each round of the winning game are displayed.

The right-hit promotion notification image 26q will continue to be displayed thereafter, and will be hidden when the game transitions to the normal game state. During this time, the image will continue to be displayed, for example, during the interval between rounds of a winning game, at the ending of a winning game, or even if the game is waiting for customers or a demo performance is being performed while the time-saving game state A is being executed. This allows the player to quickly understand the game that is most suitable for him/her.

At timing (b), the winning play ends and the opening in time-saving play state A starts, and the image display device 26 displays a text image saying "Entering time-saving play state A!" to notify the player of the upcoming transition to time-saving play state A, a right-hit promotion notification image 26q, a left decorative pattern image 26a, a middle decorative pattern image 26b, a right decorative pattern image 26c "444", and a time-saving play limit image 26ra (here, "100") to notify the number of times play is possible in time-saving play state A. Note that a fourth pattern image may be displayed instead of each decorative pattern image.

At timing (c), the opening of time-saving game state A ends and time-saving game state A begins. The image display device 26 displays an image called "Time-saving A" to notify the player that time-saving game state A is in, a right-hit promotion notification image 26q, an image of the number of times time-saving A can be played 26ra (here, "99" times), and an image (vertical scroll image) indicating that a pattern change game is being played.

Timing (d) is the timing when the time-saving game state A ends and the ending in the time-saving game state A starts, and the image display device 26 displays a text image of "Time-saving A End" notifying that the time-saving game state A has ended, a right-hit promotion notification image 26q, an image 26ra of the number of times time-saving A can be played (here, "0 times remaining"), a win count image 26s notifying the number of winning games the player has won, and a game media acquisition image 26t notifying the number of game media the player has won in winning games. The win count image 26s and the game media acquisition image 26t are collectively referred to as "game result information."
By displaying this game result information, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

Next, the timing of trigger 2 (a) is the timing when the play count counter for activating time-saving game state B reaches "898" in the normal game state and transitions to time-saving game state B (entry into time-saving game state B). The image display device 26 displays a time-saving game state B activation notification image 26u saying "Time-saving game state B activated!" to notify players that they have transitioned from the normal game state to time-saving game state B, and an image (vertical scroll image) indicating that a pattern change game is being played using each decorative pattern image.

Then, after the time-saving B activation notification image 26u is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the display ends and the right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p is displayed. At this time, the pattern change game using each decorative pattern image continues to be played. Note that the right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p displayed here may be the same image as that described in Trigger 1, or it may be a different image from that described in Trigger 1.

Then, after the right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p is displayed for a predetermined time, the display is terminated and a character selection image 26v for selecting an effect character in the time-saving game state B is displayed. At this time, the pattern change game using each decorative pattern image is continuously executed.
The character selection image 26v is an image that allows the player to select a favorite character from among Character A, Character B, and Character C, and in the time-saving game state B, an effect corresponding to the selected character is executed. Note that the winning notification method may differ for each character. For example, Character A may be more likely to produce a premium effect when it wins, and Character B may be notified immediately (so-called one-shot notification) when it wins.

In this way, in the first pattern change game that transitions to the time-saving game state B (time-saving B entry change), the right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p and the character selection image 26v are displayed using the pattern change game being executed (change pattern 18, change pattern 19).
This allows the player to be swiftly encouraged to play in an optimal manner and prevents the player from incurring losses.
Furthermore, by selecting a character in the time-shortened play state B, interest in playing in the time-shortened play state B can be increased.

In addition, in the case of a time-saving B entry fluctuation, even if the data is stored up to the fourth memory area (see Figure 9) of the reserved memory area at the start of the fluctuation, fluctuation pattern 0 is not selected, but fluctuation pattern 18 or fluctuation pattern 19 is selected (also described in detail in Figure 60).
This ensures that there is sufficient time to display the right-hit emphasis notification image 26p and the character selection image 26v.

The right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p is displayed when time-saving game state B starts, but is not displayed when time-saving game state A starts (so that it is displayed at the start of a winning game). This prevents the right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p from being displayed multiple times at trigger 1, which can be annoying to the player.

At timing (b), the special symbol D is displayed and the opening in time-saving game state B is started (for example, based on the reception of a symbol stop command), and the image display device 26 displays a text image saying "Entering time-saving game state B!" to notify the player that they will soon be entering time-saving game state B, a right-hit promotion notification image 26q, a left decorative symbol image 26a, a middle decorative symbol image 26b, and a right decorative symbol image 26c "(for example) 563". Note that a fourth symbol image may be displayed instead of each decorative symbol image.

Here, in trigger 1, in the opening during the time-saving play state, "444" (double numbers) are displayed as each decorative pattern image, whereas in trigger 2, in the opening during the time-saving play state, "(for example) 563" (variable numbers) are displayed as each decorative pattern image.
This allows the player to understand from the display mode of each decorative pattern image whether the time-saving game state was activated by Trigger 1 or Trigger 2.

In addition, in the trigger 1, in the opening in the time-saving game state, the time-saving A playable number image 26ra ("100" times) is displayed, but in the trigger 2, the time-saving B playable number image (for example, "1212" times) is not displayed.
As a result, apart from the display mode of each decorative pattern image, it is possible to know whether the time-saving game state was activated by trigger 1 or trigger 2 based on the presence or absence of an image of the number of plays available in the time-saving game state.

In addition, the time-saving game state due to trigger 1 is "100" times, and the time-saving game state due to trigger 2 is "1212" times, so trigger 1 is a good number, while trigger 2 is a bad number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by suddenly displaying the bad number of "1212" times.

In addition, the winning probability of (A-1) in FIG. 5 is "1/319", and the expected probability of winning "1/319" after 100 tries in time-saving game state A is "26.94%, while the expected probability of winning "1/319" after 1212 tries in time-saving game state B is "97.80%". From the perspective of the expected probability of winning, by displaying the time-saving A playable number image 26ra in time-saving game state A, it is possible to arouse the player's desire to play (the desire to overcome a difficult task), such as trying to win a winning game after 100 tries. Also, since most players will win a winning game within 1212 tries in time-saving game state B, by deliberately not displaying the time-saving B playable number image, it is possible to allow the player to play with ease.

The background image in the opening of time-saving play state A and the background image in the opening of time-saving play state B may be the same or different. In particular, if the background images are the same, it is more effective because it is possible to reduce background image data while still being able to determine whether the time-saving play state was activated by trigger 1 or trigger 2 based on the display mode of each decorative pattern image and the presence or absence of an image of the number of plays available in the time-saving play state.

At timing (c), the opening of time-saving play state B ends and time-saving play state B begins. The image display device 26 displays an image called "Time-saving B" to notify the player that time-saving play state B is in, a right-hit promotion notification image 26q, an image showing the number of times time-saving play B can be played 26rb (here, "1211" times), an image showing that a pattern change game is being played (vertical scroll image), and an image called "Character C" showing that character C has been selected by the player.

Timing (d) is the timing when the time-saving game state B ends and the ending in the time-saving game state B starts, and the image display device 26 displays a text image saying "Time-saving B End" to notify that the time-saving game state B has ended, a right-hit promotion notification image 26q, and an image 26rb of the number of times time-saving B can be played (here, "0 times remaining").
In this way, the "game result information" is not displayed at the end of the time-saving game state B. In particular, even if the time-saving game state B ends without a winning game, the winning count image 26s is not displayed as "0 wins" and the game medium acquisition image 26t is not displayed as "GET 0."
This makes it possible to prevent a player who is already disappointed after the time-shortened game state B ends without winning a game from becoming even more disappointed.

In addition, the number of possible plays in time-saving play state B (1212 plays) is greater than the number of possible plays in time-saving play state A (100 plays), but the ending of time-saving play state A displays game result information, while the ending of time-saving play state B does not. As a result, although the number of possible plays in time-saving play state A is fewer than that in time-saving play state B, game result information is displayed in time-saving play state A and not in time-saving play state B, so it is possible to prevent the player from getting the impression that time-saving play state B is the only one that is favored. Also, each time-saving play state can have its own special benefits (display of game result information in time-saving play state A, and the number of possible plays in time-saving play state B), which can increase interest in the game.

The background image at the end of time-saving game state A and the background image at the end of time-saving game state B may be the same or different. In particular, if the background image is the same, it is more effective because it is possible to reduce background image data while still being able to determine whether the time-saving game state was activated by trigger 1 or trigger 2 based on the presence or absence of game result information.

In addition, in trigger 2, the opening of time-saving game state B is started based on the confirmation display of the first change in time-saving game state B (reception of a pattern stop command), but the opening may start at timing (a) in trigger 2 in FIG. 53. In this case, in the pattern change game immediately before the transition to time-saving game state B, an image such as "Waiting" or an image such as "Next game favorable!" is displayed, and when the immediately previous pattern change game is confirmed at timing (a), the opening of time-saving game state B is started. After that, the right hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p or the character selection image 26v is displayed to start the time-saving game state B.

(Modification of FIG. 53)
FIG. 54 shows a modified example in FIG. 53. In the time-saving game state A, a performance (setting suggestion performance) that suggests the setting value described in FIG. 5 as predetermined game information may be performed in the opening or ending. The setting suggestion performance is, for example, a performance that directly or indirectly suggests the setting value, and when the setting value is 6, the number 6 is displayed, or an image of a character or the like that can be displayed only when the setting value is 6 (for example, an image 26w that resembles a car shown in FIG. 54(a) and (b)) is displayed, thereby suggesting the set setting value. In addition, it is possible to execute a performance that suggests that the setting value is an even number (setting values 2, 4, 6), an odd number (setting values 1, 3, 5), or a high setting (setting values 4, 5, 6). Such a setting suggestion performance may be performed with a predetermined probability (including a case where it is not performed).

In time-saving game state A, it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects in the opening and ending, while in time-saving game state B, as shown in Figures 54(d) and (e), it is also possible to not execute setting suggestion effects in the opening and ending (setting suggestion effects are not performed). In this case, as shown in Figures 54(d) and (e), the display mode in the opening and ending of time-saving game state B may be the same as the display mode in Figure 53.

In other words, based on the probability of winning, it is easier to enter the time-saving game state B with a lower setting value (e.g., setting value 1) than with a higher setting value (e.g., setting value 6), and the lower setting value (e.g., setting value 1) is more likely to complete the time-saving game state B (ending the time-saving game state B without obtaining a winning game) than a higher setting value (e.g., setting value 6).
Therefore, from the player's perspective, a low setting value is expected to be set when the game moves to time-saving game state B or when the game completes time-saving game state B. In this situation, for example, if a setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting is executed in the opening or ending of time-saving game state B, it may confuse the player or discourage them from playing the game, but by not executing a setting suggestion effect in the opening or ending of time-saving game state B, such a risk can be prevented.

In addition, the number of possible plays in time-saving play state B (1,212 plays) is greater than the number of possible plays in time-saving play state A (100 plays), but since a setting suggestion effect may be executed at the ending of time-saving play state A, but a setting suggestion effect is not executed at the ending of time-saving play state B, it is possible to prevent the player from getting the impression that time-saving play state B is favored. Also, each time-saving play state can have its own unique benefits (execution of a setting suggestion effect in time-saving play state A, and a number of possible plays in time-saving play state B), which can increase interest in the game.

In addition to the setting suggestion effect, other information may be treated in the same manner (as predetermined game information). For example, as shown in Fig. 54(c), a caution promotion image 26ck saying "Be careful not to get addicted to playing!" to encourage the player to avoid excessive playing may be displayed in the time-saving game state A (OP, ED) but may not be displayed in the time-saving game state B (OP, ED).
This makes it possible to prevent a player who has finally made the transition to the time-shortened game state B, or a player who has completed the time-shortened game state B and is disappointed, from feeling bad.

In FIG. 54, it is described that in time-saving play state A (OP, ED), setting suggestion effects and caution promotion information can be displayed, but in time-saving play state B (OP, ED), setting suggestion effects and caution promotion information are not displayed. However, it is also possible that setting suggestion effects and caution promotion information are more likely to be displayed in time-saving play state A (OP, ED) than in time-saving play state B (OP, ED). In other words, setting suggestion effects and caution promotion information may also be displayed in time-saving play state B (OP, ED).

(Time chart 2 showing the characteristics of trigger 1 and trigger 2)
Fig. 55 (a) shows a case where the time-saving B entry fluctuation described in Fig. 53 is a win (fluctuation pattern 19). When the time-saving B entry fluctuation is a win, the image display device 26 displays the same as when it is a miss described in Fig. 53. Then, when the character selection is completed, a special winning symbol (e.g., special symbol A) is displayed as a confirmed winning symbol at timing (b), and a winning game starts without transitioning to the time-saving game state B.
With this configuration, the player is shown to be shifting to the time-shortened game state B, and is informed that a winning game will be executed instead, so that the player can be surprised.

In addition, when the time-saving B entry fluctuation is a hit, the image display device 26 displays the same as in the case of a miss as described in Figure 53 (a), but it may also be in the form shown in the modified example of Figure 53 (b).
Specifically, a pattern change game is started at timing (a), a reach is formed without displaying the time-saving B activation notification image 26u, and then a pattern indicating a winning game (e.g., 777) is provisionally displayed, and is confirmed at timing (b).
With this configuration, since the time-saving B activation notification image 26u is not displayed, the player can know that a winning game will be awarded, which leads to increased interest in the game.

(Time chart 3 showing the characteristics of trigger 1 and trigger 2)
56 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the winning ending when a winning game is won during the execution of each time-saving game state. In the trigger 1, at timing (a), the ending of the winning game won in the normal game state is completed, and at timing (b), for example, a winning game is won (special symbol E is confirmed and displayed) in the 50th symbol variation game in the time-saving game state A. Then, at timing (c), when the final round ends, the ending of the winning game starts.

At the end of a winning game, a text image saying "Into the special probability mode!" and a right-hit promotion notification image 26q are displayed to notify the player that a special probability mode will be entered after the winning game. In addition to these images, in the example of FIG. 56, a setting suggestion effect is executed, and an image 26w resembling a car is displayed. In other words, at the end of a winning game of trigger 1, a setting suggestion effect can be executed. Then, when the ending of the winning game ends, the special probability mode will start from timing (d).

In trigger 2, at timing (a), the play count counter for activating time-saving play state B reaches "898" in the normal play state, and at timing (b), for example, a winning play is won (special pattern E is confirmed and displayed) in the 50th pattern change game in time-saving play state B. Then, at timing (c), when the final round ends, the ending of the winning play begins.

At the end of a winning game, a text image saying "Into the special probability mode!" and a right-hit promotion notification image 26q are displayed to notify the player that a special probability mode will be entered after the winning game. In addition to these images, in the example of FIG. 56, a setting suggestion effect is being executed, and an image 26w resembling a car is being displayed. In other words, at the end of a winning game of trigger 2, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect.

At the end of the winning game of trigger 2, a text image such as "Entering the special probability mode!" is displayed for a predetermined time, followed by a text image saying "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" for a predetermined time to remind the player not to forget to take the valuable medium inserted into the insertion slot of the game ball lending device. Next, an image showing the "company logo" indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1 is displayed for a predetermined time, followed by a caution promotion image 26ck saying "Be careful not to get addicted to the game!" for a predetermined time. Then, when the ending of the winning game ends, the special probability mode starts at timing (d).

The text image "Entering special mode!" is displayed every time the player transitions to the special mode game state, while "Be careful not to forget to pick up your cards!", "Company logo", and "Be careful not to get addicted to the game!" are displayed, for example, when a winning game is won in the normal game state or when a winning game is won in the time-saving game state B.
In other words, in the case of opportunity 1, since "Be careful not to forget to pick up your card!", "Company logo", and "Be careful not to get addicted to the game!" were displayed by timing (a) (at the ending of the first winning game), they are not displayed between timings (c) and (d). On the other hand, in the case of opportunity 2, since these displays were not performed at least "898" times until the time-saving game state B was activated and "50" times between timings (a) and (b), they are displayed between timings (c) and (d).
This allows images such as "Don't forget to take your card!", "Company logo", and "Don't get too addicted to playing!" to be displayed appropriately, making it possible to adequately warn players ("Don't forget to take your card!", "Don't get too addicted to playing!") and to advertise ("Company logo").

In addition, in both time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B, there is a high possibility that one (same) player will continue playing during the time-saving game state. For example, if a winning game occurs around 1212 plays, which is the upper limit number of plays in time-saving game state B, the same player will have played continuously up to around 1212 plays. In such a situation, if an image such as "Be careful not to get addicted to playing!" is displayed in the winning game ending performance, it can help the player regain his composure and encourage him to play in moderation.

The setting suggestion effect may be easier to execute for trigger 1 than for trigger 2. In other words, since it is more difficult to win a winning game in time-saving game state A than to win a winning game in time-saving game state B, if that difficulty is achieved, a bonus commensurate with the difficulty may be awarded.

(Time-saving B hint effect)
Figure 57 shows an example of execution of a presentation (time-saving B suggestion presentation) in which the light-emitting state of the light-emitting part of the movable body 28 indicates whether or not the processing of step S7 in Figure 10 or step S5-1 in Figure 11 has been performed (whether or not the main RAM 103 has been cleared), and Figures 58 and 59 show modified examples of the time-saving B suggestion presentation.

First, the island equipment on which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed is provided with a variation count display (not shown) that displays the number of variation displays of the executed symbol variation game. For example, every time a symbol variation game is executed, information is output from an external terminal output (not shown) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the variation count display is updated (the number is added). Therefore, the player can grasp or estimate the number of plays until the transition to time-saving gaming state B from the number of plays displayed on the variation count display.

In Figures 57 to 59, if the main RAM 103 is not cleared, at the timing when the gaming arcade opens (timing (b)), the number of fluctuations displayed by the fluctuation count indicator will be "0". For example, there may be cases where the number of fluctuations displayed by the fluctuation count indicator is "0" and the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) is "0" (when the values match), and there may also be cases where the number of fluctuations displayed by the fluctuation count indicator is "0" and the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) is "100" (when the values do not match).
Therefore, there are cases where the game transitions to time-saving game state B when the number of fluctuations displayed on the fluctuation count display reaches "898," and cases where the game transitions to time-saving game state B before the number of fluctuations displayed on the fluctuation count display reaches "898."

If you know the number on the variable number display when the gaming establishment closes the previous day, you can know or guess how many more times it will take to transition to time-saving gaming state B when the gaming establishment opens the next day. However, since main RAM 103 may be cleared, transition to time-saving gaming state B does not necessarily occur when the number of times at the closing time of the previous day (e.g. 100) plus the number of times since the establishment opens the next day (e.g. 798) is added. If main RAM 103 is cleared, transition to time-saving gaming state B will occur when the number of times since the establishment opens the next day is 898.

The number of times the change display is made may be displayed not only on the change number display but also on the image display device 26. In this case, the number of times the change display is made to be displayed on the image display device 26 is linked to the number of times the change display is made to be displayed on the change number display. This makes it possible to grasp the number of times the change display is made on the image display device 26.

Pattern 1 in FIG. 57 is an example of a case where the main RAM 103 is not cleared. Timing (a) indicates that the power is turned on before the gaming establishment opens, and at this time the number of plays counter (the number of plays counter for activating the time-saving gaming state B) is set to "100." When the power is turned on, the movable body 28 is lit in white.

Then, when the gaming establishment opens and the first symbol change game (first change) starts at timing (b), the light-emitting portion of the movable body 28 changes from white to blue at the start of the change. Then, after the blue light has been lit for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5S), it changes to a changing light at timing (c). In other words, the light-emitting state of the movable body 28 changes during the 5S period at the start of the change.

In addition, between timings (b) and (c), including the following pattern 2 and the case where the RAM is cleared, the means for executing the time-saving B suggestion performance (the movable body 28 in the example of FIG. 57) does not execute the big win notice performance, but executes only the time-saving B suggestion performance. In addition, after timing (c), the means for executing the time-saving B suggestion performance (the movable body 28 in the example of FIG. 57) is allowed to execute the big win notice performance, but does not execute the time-saving B suggestion performance.
This makes it possible to prevent confusion for the player caused by, for example, the movable body 28 simultaneously executing a big win advance notice performance and a time-saving B suggestion performance.
In addition, the period during which attention should be paid to the time-saving B suggestive performance and the period during which attention should be paid to the big win advance notice performance can be clearly defined, thereby preventing each performance from being overlooked.

For example, when the time-saving B suggestion performance is being performed on the movable body 28, the image display device 26 may execute a jackpot advance notice performance, or, for example, when the time-saving B suggestion performance is being performed on the image display device 26, the image display device 26 may execute a jackpot advance notice performance.

Pattern 2 in FIG. 57 is an example of a case where the main RAM 103 is not cleared. Timing (a) shows the power being turned on before the gaming establishment opens, and at this time the number of plays counter (the number of plays counter for activating the time-saving gaming state B) is set to "698." When the power is turned on, the movable body 28 is lit in white.

When the gaming establishment opens and the first symbol change game (first change) starts at timing (b), the light-emitting portion of the movable body 28 changes from white to red at the start of the change. After the red light remains on for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5S), the light changes to a changing light at timing (c). In other words, the light-emitting state of the movable body 28 changes during the 5S period at the start of the change.

As shown in patterns 1 and 2, when the main RAM 103 is not cleared, the lighting color is changed depending on the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) (the value until time-saving play state B is activated). For example, in the case of pattern 1, the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) is "100", so there is still a need for more plays before time-saving play state B is activated. On the other hand, in the case of pattern 2, the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) is "698", so time-saving play state B will be activated soon. Therefore, pattern 2 is a situation in which the expectation of time-saving play state B is higher than pattern 1.

By indicating such differences in situation with the light color (different colors), it is possible to draw attention to the color that is illuminated when the fluctuation begins. The light color may be modeled after the light color that indicates the expectation of a win described in the "reserve pre-reading effect" above. For example, the red light shown in pattern 2 may indicate a higher expectation of execution of time-saving play state B than the blue light shown in pattern 1. This makes it easier to grasp that "red" indicates a situation where there is a high expectation of a bonus (e.g., a winning game, time-saving play state) and "blue" indicates a situation where there is a low expectation of a bonus, regardless of whether it is a "reserve pre-reading effect" or a "time-saving B suggestion effect," making it easier to understand the effects in general.

The lighting color may be determined according to the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B). For example, the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) values of "0" to "200" are "blue", "201" to "400" are "yellow", "401" to "600" are "green", and "601" and above are "red".
On the other hand, "0" to "200" allow all colors to be selected, but "blue" may be more easily selected than other colors, "201" to "400" allow all colors to be selected, but "yellow" may be more easily selected than other colors, "401" to "600" allow all colors to be selected, but "green" may be more easily selected than other colors, and from "601" onwards, all colors may be selected, but "red" may be more easily selected than other colors.

In addition, the light is not limited to being lit, but may be flashing, and may be performed not only by the light-emitting portion of the movable body 28, but also by the light-emitting device 9 in the glass frame or the board lighting device 29. In addition, the time-saving B suggestion effect may be performed by the movement of the movable body 28.

The time-saving B suggestion effect may also be executed by a means (device) that does not execute the jackpot prediction effect. For example, in the movable body 28, if the jackpot prediction effect is not executed in the light-emitting state or the operating state, but the time-saving B suggestion effect is executed exclusively, it is possible to prevent confusion as to whether the time-saving B suggestion effect or the jackpot prediction effect has been executed.

In addition, it is preferable that the means (devices) for executing the jackpot prediction performance, and the means (devices) for executing the performance that has a high expectation of a winning game among the jackpot prediction performances, do not execute the time-saving B suggestion performance. For example, the performance button 14 and performance lever 15 that perform the above-mentioned "vibration prediction" do not execute the time-saving B suggestion performance (which vibrates). This prevents the player from being mistakenly convinced that there is a high expectation of a winning game in the pattern change game due to the vibration of the performance button 14 and performance lever 15 at the start of the pattern change game.

On the other hand, in FIG. 57, if the main RAM 103 has been cleared, when the power ON+RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON at timing (a), for example, the movable body 28 flashes white for a predetermined period of time and then lights up white. That is, it emits light in a lighting pattern (flashing white) that indicates that the main RAM 103 has been cleared for a predetermined period of time. Also, since the main RAM 103 is considered to have been cleared when the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) is "100", the operation at timing (a) sets the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) to "0".

Then, when the gaming establishment opens and the first symbol change game (first change) starts at timing (b), the light-emitting portion of the movable body 28 changes from lit white to off at the start of the change. Then, when the light is off for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5S), it changes to lit during change at timing (c). In other words, the light-emitting state of the movable body 28 changes during the 5S period at the start of the change. Note that if the main RAM 103 has been cleared, the light-emitting portion of the movable body 28 is always turned off at the start of the change.

In this way, when the main RAM 103 is cleared, the light emitting portion of the movable body 28 is turned off. This allows the player to focus on whether the light emitting portion of the movable body 28 is turned on or off during the first pattern change game (first change), and, if it is turned on, what color it is turned on.

In addition, when the main RAM 103 is cleared, the light-emitting portion of the movable body 28 is always turned off, so there is no ambiguous indication that the main RAM 103 may have been cleared, and the player can clearly determine whether or not to play, preventing the player from playing excessively.

Figure 58 shows modified example 1 of the time-saving B suggestion effect. Figure 57 explains an example of executing the time-saving B suggestion effect in the first pattern change game after the opening of the amusement arcade, but Figure 58 shows an example of executing the time-saving B suggestion effect in the 100th pattern change game after the opening of the amusement arcade, and in the 200th pattern change game after the opening of the amusement arcade.

Pattern 1 in FIG. 58 is an example of a case where the main RAM 103 has not been cleared. Timing (a) shows the power being turned on before the gaming establishment opens, and at this time the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving gaming state B) is set to "100." Note that "123" is displayed on the image display device 26 as the initial result of each of the left, center, and right decorative pattern images 26a to 26c when the power is turned on. The same display state is also observed when the gaming establishment opens at timing (b).

Timing (c) is the timing when 100 symbol change games have been played since the opening of the gaming establishment, and the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) reaches "200". At this time, a non-clear suggestion character image 26y, which suggests that the main RAM 103 has not been cleared, is displayed on the image display device 26 for a predetermined time (e.g., 5S). Note that the non-clear suggestion character image 26y is an image that suggests that the main RAM 103 has not been cleared, and is not an image that suggests the expectation of a winning game, so the timing for displaying it is preferably the start of the symbol change game.

Timing (d) is the timing when 200 symbol-changing games have been played since the opening of the gaming establishment, and the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving game state B) reaches "300". At this time, the image display device 26 displays a countdown image 26x (in the example of pattern 1, an image such as "500 more until time-saving B") indicating the specific number of plays until the transition to time-saving game state B. Note that the countdown image 26x is displayed, for example, at the start of the symbol-changing game. Also, at timing (d), it is displayed in an emphasized manner for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, it is displayed continuously in a small size in the corner of the display area for each game.

Pattern 2 in FIG. 58 is an example of a case where the main RAM 103 has not been cleared. Timing (a) shows the power being turned on before the gaming establishment opens, and at this time the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving gaming state B) is set to "598." Note that "123" is displayed on the image display device 26 as the initial result of each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c on the left, center, and right when the power is turned on. The same display state is also displayed when the gaming establishment opens at timing (b).

Timing (c) is the timing when 100 pattern change games have been played since the opening of the gaming establishment, and the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) reaches "698." At this time, the image display device 26 displays a non-clear suggestion character image 26y for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) suggesting that the main RAM 103 has not been cleared.

At timing (d), 200 symbol-changing games have been played since the opening of the gaming establishment, and the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) has reached "798." At this time, the image display device 26 displays a countdown image 26x (in the example of pattern 2, an image such as "100 more games until time-saving play state B") indicating the specific number of plays until the transition to time-saving play state B is made.

In this way, in Pattern 1 and Pattern 2, the time-saving B suggestion effect is executed in stages. In particular, in the first stage (timing (c)), it is only suggested that the main RAM 103 has not been cleared, and the number of plays until the time-saving game state B is entered is not suggested, and in the second stage (timing (d)), the number of plays until the time-saving game state B is entered is suggested. This makes it possible to improve the operation of gaming machines for a certain period of time after the opening of the gaming establishment.

The non-clear suggestion character image 26y is displayed with, for example, a 50% chance based on a predetermined lottery, but it may be configured not to be displayed with a 50% chance.
Also, the pattern may be configured to be easily displayed (easily selected) or difficult to display (easily selected) depending on the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B). For example, pattern 2 may be more easily displayed (easily selected) than pattern 1.
In addition, if the number of plays until the transition to the time-saving play state B is less than a predetermined number of plays (for example, less than 200), the non-clear suggestion character image 26y may be always displayed.
On the other hand, the countdown image 26x is always displayed.
In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing playing excessively due to the vague suggestions being given indefinitely.

In addition, the countdown image 26x is displayed at timing (d) and then continues to be displayed for each game, but for example, it may be hidden when a reach is in progress, or it may remain displayed. If it is hidden, it is possible to focus on the reach. On the other hand, if it remains displayed, it is possible to know the number of games remaining until the transition to time-saving game state B, even during a reach.

On the other hand, in FIG. 58, if the main RAM 103 is cleared, when the power ON+RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON at timing (a), the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) changes from "598" to "0." Note that "123" is displayed on the image display device 26 as the initial number result of each of the left, center, and right decorative pattern images 26a to 26c when the power is ON. In other words, it is not possible to know from the state of the initial number result of each of the left, center, and right decorative pattern images 26a to 26c whether the main RAM 103 is cleared or not.

The same display appears when the gaming establishment opens at timing (b), and the value of the number of plays counter (the number of plays counter for activating time-saving gaming state B) is "0."

At timing (c), 100 symbol change games have been played since the opening of the gaming establishment, and the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) has reached "100." At this time, the non-clear suggestion character image 26y is not displayed on the image display device 26.

Timing (d) is the timing when 200 symbol-changing games have been played since the opening of the gaming establishment, and the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) reaches "200". At this time, the image display device 26 displays a countdown image 26x (in the example of pattern 2, an image such as "698 more games until time-saving play state B") indicating the specific number of plays until the transition to time-saving play state B is made. This countdown image 26x is always displayed at timing (d), just like patterns 1 and 2.

In this way, when the main RAM 103 is cleared, no suggestion is given in the first stage (timing (c)), but the number of games to be played until the game transitions to the time-saving game state B is suggested in the second stage (timing (d)).
As described above, even if the main RAM 103 is not cleared, the non-clear suggestion character image 26y may not be displayed, so that in the first stage (timing (c)), it may be impossible to know whether the main RAM 103 is cleared or not. In this case, it is possible to make the player want to continue playing until the second stage (timing (d)), thereby improving the operation of the pachinko game machine 1.
In addition, since the countdown image 26x is always displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing playing excessively due to ambiguous suggestions being given endlessly.

Figure 59 shows modified example 2 of the time-saving B suggestion effect. Figures 57 and 58 explain an example of executing the time-saving B suggestion effect while the pattern change game is being played, but in Figure 59, the time-saving B suggestion effect is executed based on the initial results of the left, center, and right decorative pattern images 26a to 26c when the power is turned on.

First, when the main RAM 103 has not been cleared, timing (a) indicates that the power is turned on before the gaming establishment opens, and at this time the number of plays counter (number of plays counter for activating time-saving gaming state B) is set to "100." Note that "357" is displayed on the image display device 26 as the initial result of each of the left, center, and right decorative pattern images 26a to 26c when the power is turned on. The same display state is also displayed when the gaming establishment opens at timing (b).

At timing (c), 698 symbol-changing games have been played since the opening of the gaming establishment, and the value of the game play counter (the game play counter for activating time-saving game state B) has reached "798." At this time, a countdown image 26x is displayed on the image display device 26.

On the other hand, if the main RAM 103 is cleared, when the power ON + RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON at timing (a), the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) changes from "100" to "0." Note that "774" is displayed on the image display device 26 as the initial numbers of the left, center, and right decorative pattern images 26a to 26c when the power is ON. In other words, the initial numbers of the left, center, and right decorative pattern images 26a to 26c are made different when the main RAM 103 is not cleared from when the main RAM 103 is cleared. This allows the player to select a gaming machine to play on based on the initial number combination, and draws attention to what combination of symbols is displayed as the initial number combination.

The same display appears when the gaming establishment opens at timing (b), and the value of the number of plays counter (the number of plays counter for activating time-saving gaming state B) is "0."

At timing (c), 798 symbol-changing games have been played since the opening of the game arcade, and the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving game state B) is "798". At this time, the countdown image 26x is displayed on the image display device 26. As in FIG. 58, this countdown image 26x is always displayed at timing (d). In the example of FIG. 59, it is possible to know whether the main RAM 103 has been cleared or not from the state of the initial roll, so it can be said that it is easier to know whether the main RAM 103 has been cleared or not than in the example of FIG. 58. Therefore, the countdown image 26x is displayed when the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving game state B) is "798", that is, in a situation closer to time-saving game state B than in the example of FIG. 58. This allows an appropriate balance to be achieved between the example of FIG. 58 and the example of FIG. 59.

When multiple setting values are provided, the time-saving B suggestion effect may be easier or harder to appear depending on the setting value. For example, when the set setting value is 1 and the main RAM 103 is not cleared, the time-saving B suggestion effect may be harder to appear than when the set setting value is 6 and the main RAM 103 is not cleared. This allows the setting value to be inferred from the frequency with which the time-saving B suggestion effect appears, further increasing interest in the game.

(Time chart 1 explaining the time-saving B entry fluctuation)
60 is a time chart explaining the time-saving B entry fluctuation. First, case 1 explains the fluctuation pattern executed when the reserved ball number becomes "3" at the start of the symbol fluctuation game in the normal game state.

Timing (a) is when the special symbol D is confirmed and the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) reaches "100." At this time, the icon is erased and the reserved icon is displayed in all of the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j.

Then, when the predetermined time interval between changes has elapsed, the next pattern change game (next change) starts at timing (b). At this time, the reserved icon displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g slides to the corresponding change icon display area 26o, and the reserved icons displayed in the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j slide to the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, and the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i.

At this time, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern 0 (special symbol hit determination process=miss), and the image display device 26 executes a variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern 0. That is, a shortened variation is executed.
In this way, in the normal game state, if reserve 4 changes to reserve 3 at the start of the change, a shortened change is executed.

On the other hand, case 2 describes the change pattern to be executed when the number of reserved balls becomes "3" at the start of the first pattern change game in the time-saving game state B.
Until the timing (a), the game is in a normal game state, that is, a symbol change game is being executed immediately before the game is shifted to the time-saving game state B. At this time, the image display device 26 displays a time-saving B preview image 26jy, which indicates that the game state in which the next symbol change game is to be executed is the time-saving game state B.

At timing (a), the special symbol D is displayed as confirmed, and the value of the play count counter (play count counter for activating time-saving play state B) becomes "898." At this time, the icon is erased, and the reserved icon is displayed in all of the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j.

Then, when the predetermined time between changes has elapsed, the next symbol change game (next change) starts at timing (b). At this time, the reserved icon displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g slides to the corresponding change icon display area 26o, and the reserved icons displayed in the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j slide to the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, and the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i.
In other words, the situation stored in the reservation memory area is the same as in case 1.

At this time, in case 1, variation pattern 0 was executed, but in case 2, because it is a time-saving entry variation, the main CPU 101 determines variation pattern 18 (special symbol hit determination process = miss), and the image display device 26 executes a variation performance pattern corresponding to variation pattern 18. In other words, even though the situation stored in the reserved memory area is the same as in case 1, the shortened variation is not executed, and specific variation A is executed.

And because specific variation A has a variation time of 40S, this variation time is used to display the time-saving B activation notification image 26u, the right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p, and the character selection image 26v. In this way, even though the situation stored in the reserved memory area is the same as in case 1, by executing specific variation A without executing the shortened variation, it is possible to provide the player with the information necessary for play from timing (b) onwards.

(Time chart 2 explaining the time-saving B entry fluctuation)
61 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation of entering the time-saving game state B. In particular, it shows the display state of the image display device 26 in a situation where the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B reaches "898" and the condition for entering the time-saving game state B is satisfied, but there is no subsequent reserved game.

Up until timing (a), the pattern change game is shown just before the transition to time-saving game state B. At this time, the icon is displayed only in the change icon display area 26o, and no icon is displayed in the first start hole first reserved ball image display area 26g, etc., resulting in a so-called "reservation 0" state with no subsequent reservations.

In this state, the display confirms the winning combination at timing (a). Since the state is "0 reserved", the next symbol variation game does not start and the state becomes "waiting for customers".
However, since the play count counter for activating the time-saving game state B reaches "898" and satisfies the condition for transitioning to the time-saving game state B, for example, based on reception of a stop command (for example, game state command_time-saving B) at timing (a), the background image of the image display device 26 is changed to a background image corresponding to the time-saving game state B. Also, a right-hit promotion notification image 26q is displayed.

As a result, even players who are inexperienced at playing can understand from the display of these images that it is better for them to continue playing, and this prevents the player from quitting the game (and suffering a loss) because the "0 reserved" state has been reached at timing (a).

Then, at timing (b), when a start winning occurs (when a game ball wins in one of the start holes), the symbol change game starts, and the performance control board 200 receives a start command (for example, a command to specify a special symbol change pattern), and based on receiving the command, the image display device 26 displays a time-saving B activation notification image 26u, a right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p, and a character selection image 26v.

In addition, the right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p may be displayed based on receiving a start command based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22, or it may be displayed based on receiving a start command based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 21, rather than based on receiving a start command based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 22, where it can be determined that a right-hit has already been performed.
In the former case, the right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p is displayed in any case, thereby encouraging the player to play in the most optimal manner.
On the other hand, in the latter case, it is possible to prevent the player who is likely to have already hit the right button from feeling "annoyed" or "annoyed" by displaying the right-hit promotion emphasis notification image 26p.

Note that while FIG. 61 describes a case where the state is "Pending 0" at timing (a), the display of various images based on the reception of various commands is performed in the same manner whether the state is "Pending 0" or "Pending 4". This makes it possible to make the correspondence between various commands and the display of various images uniform regardless of the pending state, eliminating the need to change processing depending on the pending state and preventing control from becoming complicated.

(Time chart 1 explaining trigger 1 and trigger 2 in normal gaming state)
Next, using Fig. 62, the trigger 1 and the trigger 2 in the normal gaming state will be described. Fig. 62 is a simplified time chart for explaining the trigger 1 and the trigger 2 (particularly the pattern change game performed immediately before the transition to the time-saving gaming state A or B) in the normal gaming state. The trigger 1 may be a win in the pattern change game in which the play count counter for activating the time-saving gaming state B reaches "898".

First, in the case of trigger 1, in the immediately preceding symbol change game, it is possible to select from change patterns 6 to 11 in FIG. 8. In other words, in the case of trigger 1, a reach will always occur in the immediately preceding symbol change game.

In addition, as the big win notice performance, the above-mentioned big win notice performance A, big win notice performance B, and big win notice performance C can be selected. In other words, in the case of opportunity 1, the big win notice performance A, big win notice performance B, and big win notice performance C can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, and the so-called premium notice can also be selected.
In addition, between the jackpot prediction performance A and the jackpot prediction performance B, there is a tendency for the jackpot prediction performance B to be selected more easily.

Then, when the symbol-changing game ends at timing (b) and the symbol is displayed as a fixed symbol (win), the winning game starts, and when the winning game ends at timing (c), the game transitions to time-saving game state A.

Next, in the case of trigger 2, in the immediately preceding symbol change game, it is possible to select from the change patterns 0 to 5 in FIG. 8. In other words, in the case of trigger 2, a reach may or may not occur in the immediately preceding symbol change game.

In addition, as the big win notice performance, the above-mentioned big win notice performance A and big win notice performance B can be selected. In other words, in the case of opportunity 2, the big win notice performance A and big win notice performance B can be selected in the immediately preceding symbol variation game, and the so-called premium notice cannot be selected.
In addition, between the jackpot prediction performance A and the jackpot prediction performance B, there is a tendency that the jackpot prediction performance A is more likely to be selected.
Then, when the symbol variation game ends at timing (b) and the symbol is displayed as a confirmed symbol (miss), the game state shifts to a time-saving game state B.

Comparing opportunity 1 and opportunity 2, in the case of opportunity 1, a reach always occurs in the immediately preceding pattern change game, but in the case of opportunity 2, a reach may or may not occur.
In addition, in the case of opportunity 1, it is possible to select the premier notice in the immediately preceding pattern change game, but in the case of opportunity 2, it is not possible to select the premier notice in the immediately preceding pattern change game.
In addition, in the case of trigger 1, it is easy to select the big win notice performance B, which has a high expectation of winning in a winning game, in the immediately preceding pattern change game, but in the case of trigger 2, it is easy to select the big win notice performance A, which has a low expectation of winning in a winning game, in the immediately preceding pattern change game.
From such a tendency, it is possible to guess which trigger will cause the game to transition to the time-saving game mode based on the content of the symbol-changing game (whether there is a reach or not, the content of the big win notice performance). This allows the player to pay attention to the content of the previous symbol-changing game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The content of the symbol change game is not limited to that shown in FIG. 62. For example, in the case of trigger 1, multiple types of jackpot preview effects may be more likely to occur in combination, and in the case of trigger 2, multiple types of jackpot preview effects may be less likely to occur in combination. In this way, the same effect can be obtained.

(Time chart 2 explaining trigger 1 and trigger 2 in normal gaming state)
Next, the trigger 1 and the trigger 2 in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 63. Fig. 63 is a simplified time chart for explaining the transition to the time-saving gaming state A by the trigger 1 and the transition to the time-saving gaming state B by the trigger 2 (particularly, the performance performed before the transition).

First, it is assumed that trigger 1 is a win (special symbol C) at timing (a) (a win occurs and the symbol associated with the win is displayed). In this case, the win game is played until timing (b). Here, during the win game, a promotion effect may be performed to determine whether or not the game state after the win game ends will transition to a special probability game state. For example, a promotion effect can be performed when special symbol B is determined and the decorative symbol combination of "444" is determined, or when special symbol C is determined and the decorative symbol combination of "444" is determined. In this case, the former results in a successful promotion effect, and the latter results in a failed promotion effect.

In the promotion effect, during a winning game, an image such as "Press the button to win a special chance!" and an image that resembles the effect button 14 are displayed on the image display device 26, enabling operation of the effect button 14.

In the example of Figure 63, it is assumed that special symbol C has been determined, so as a result of operating the effect button 14, an image indicating that the promotion effect has failed (such as an image of "X Too bad...") is displayed.

When the winning game ends at timing (b), the game transitions to time-saving A opening (time-saving AOP), and when the time-saving OP ends at timing (c), the game transitions to time-saving game state A.

In this way, in trigger 1, before transitioning to time-saving game state A (for example, between the time when the confirmed pattern is displayed and transitioning to time-saving game state A = during winning game), the operation means (effect button 14) is used to perform an effect (promotion effect) indicating whether or not to transition to a guaranteed variable game state. Note that, since a failure in the promotion effect results in a transition to time-saving game state A, it can also be interpreted as an effect indicating whether or not to transition to time-saving game state A (effect suggesting a transition to time-saving game state A).

Next, it is assumed that trigger 2 is when the play count counter for activating time-saving game state B reaches "898" at timing (a) and the special symbol D is confirmed and displayed. Then, time-saving B opening (time-saving BOP) is performed from timing (a) to timing (b), and the game transitions to time-saving game state B from timing (b).

In this way, at trigger 2, before transitioning to time-shortened game state B (for example, between the time when the pattern is displayed as determined and the time when the game transitions to time-shortened game state B = time-shortened BOP), no presentation as to whether or not to transition to time-shortened game state B is performed using the operating means (presentation button 14).
In this way, at trigger 1, before transitioning to time-shortened play state A, the operation means (effect button 14) is used to perform an effect to indicate whether or not to transition to time-shortened play state A, but at trigger 2, before transitioning to time-shortened play state B, the operation means (effect button 14) is not used to perform an effect to indicate whether or not to transition to time-shortened play state B.
In particular, in the case of trigger 1, if the promotion effect is successful, the game will transition to a certain variable game state, and if the promotion effect is unsuccessful, the game will transition to time-limited game state A, so it is meaningful to inform the player of which game state the game will transition to by operating the effect button 14. On the other hand, in the case of trigger 2, the transition to time-limited game state B is confirmed (there are no other options), so by transitioning to time-limited game state B without having the player take the trouble of operating the effect button 14, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

(Time chart 3 explaining trigger 1 and trigger 2 in normal gaming state)
Next, another example of the promotion effect described in Fig. 63 will be described with reference to Fig. 64. Note that the description of the parts that overlap with Fig. 63 will be omitted as appropriate.

First, it is assumed that trigger 1 is when the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to the special symbol C is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing (a) (a win has been confirmed for the time being). Note that the symbol change game continues before and after timing (a).

After that, although not shown in the figure, the sub-symbols are scrolled vertically to execute a re-draw effect that is performed between the provisional stop display and the final display. The re-draw effect is an effect that allows the provisionally stopped sub-symbol to be changed to another sub-symbol. For example, if the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to the special symbol B is provisionally stopped, it is possible to change it to another sub-symbol (333 = a sub-symbol that suggests a transition to a probability change game state) in the re-draw effect, and if the sub-symbol (444) corresponding to the special symbol C is provisionally stopped, it is impossible to change it to another sub-symbol (333 = a sub-symbol that suggests a transition to a probability change game state) in the re-draw effect, and as a result of the re-draw effect, the sub-symbol (444) is displayed as a final display.

In the example of Figure 64, it is assumed that the sub-pattern (444) corresponding to the special pattern C is provisionally stopped and displayed, so even if an image such as "Aim for a pattern UP!" and an image imitating the effect button 14 are displayed and a re-draw effect is executed, the sub-pattern that is confirmed and displayed will be "444."
Then, after a winning game, the game state shifts to a time-saving game state A.

Incidentally, in trigger 2, such a redraw effect is not performed. That is, at timing (a), the sub-pattern (526) corresponding to the miss is displayed as a provisional stop, at timing (b), the special pattern D and the sub-pattern (526) are displayed as a confirmed combination, at timing (b), the game transitions to the time-saving BOP, and at timing (c), the game transitions to the time-saving game state B.

In this way, in trigger 1, a re-draw effect is performed using the operation means (effect button 14) before the transition to time-saving game state A (particularly, between the temporary stop display and the final display), but in trigger 2, a re-draw effect is not performed using the operation means (effect button 14) before the transition to time-saving game state B (particularly, between the temporary stop display and the final display). This provides the same effect as that described in FIG. 63.

(Regarding the relationship between songs that can be output between Moment 1 and Moment 2)
Next, the relationship between music that can be output at the trigger 1 and the trigger 2 will be described with reference to Fig. 65. Fig. 65 is a simplified time chart for explaining music that can be output when the game transitions to the time-saving game state A at the trigger 1, and music that can be output when the game transitions to the time-saving game state B at the trigger 2.

Here, a song is assumed to be a song (with lyrics, for example) sung by a singer or the like, and the player can select one of a number of songs during a winning game or in a special probability game state (cannot be selected in a normal game state). This makes it possible to lift the player's spirits during a winning game or in a special probability game state.

First, it is assumed that the trigger 1 is a timing (a) in which the special symbol C is definitely displayed. Then, thereafter, a winning game is played until a timing (b).
In this winning game, it is possible to select a song, and in the example of Fig. 65, it is assumed that the player selects song A by operating the effect button 14. When song A is selected, song A is output from the speaker 10.

When the winning game ends at timing (b), the game transitions to the time-saving AOP, and when the time-saving AOP ends at timing (c), the game transitions to time-saving game state A. In time-saving game state A, background music during the time-saving game is output from speaker 10.

Here, the time-saving BGM is assumed to be, for example, a melody without lyrics of a song sung by a singer, etc., and in time-saving play state A, a single time-saving BGM will be output.

Next, in trigger 2, it is assumed that the play count counter for activating time-saving game state B reaches "898" at timing (a), and special symbol D is confirmed and displayed. Then, the time-saving BOP is performed from timing (a) to timing (b), and the game transitions to time-saving game state B from timing (b). Then, in time-saving game state B, the speaker 10 outputs time-saving BGM similar to that of trigger 1.

Comparing the above mentioned trigger 1 and trigger 2, the number of songs that can be output from when the symbols are displayed to when the game transitions to the time-shortened game state is greater in trigger 1 than in trigger 2, since a winning game is involved. This makes it possible to add value to a player who has gained the right to transition to time-shortened game state A through a winning game. In trigger 1, the song selected in the winning game may be output in time-shortened game state A as is, or song selection may be possible in time-shortened game state A as well. This makes it possible to add further value to trigger 1.

(Time chart 1 explaining the time-saving game state A transitioned to by trigger 1 and the time-saving game state B transitioned to by trigger 2)
Next, the time-saving game state A entered at the trigger 1 and the time-saving game state B entered at the trigger 2 will be described with reference to Fig. 66. Fig. 66 is a simplified time chart for explaining background images and the like of the time-saving game state A entered at the trigger 1 and the time-saving game state B entered at the trigger 2.

First, it is assumed that trigger 1 is when special symbol C is confirmed and displayed at timing (a). After that, the winning game continues until timing (b). When the winning game ends at timing (b), the game transitions to the time-saving AOP, and when the time-saving AOP ends at timing (c), the game transitions to time-saving game state A.

In time-saving game state A, a background image, for example, of a car driving on a road, is displayed on the image display device 26. Also, time-saving BGM 1 corresponding to the background image is output from the speaker 10.

Next, it is assumed that trigger 2 is when the play count counter for activating time-saving play state B reaches "898" at timing (a) and the special symbol D is confirmed and displayed. Then, the time-saving BOP is performed from timing (a) to timing (b), and the game transitions to time-saving play state B from timing (b).

In time-saving game state B, a background image, for example a mountain view, is displayed on image display device 26. Also, time-saving BGM 2 corresponding to the background image is output from speaker 10.

Comparing trigger 1 and trigger 2, the background image in the time-saving game state and the BGM during the time-saving game state are different between the time-saving game state A entered at trigger 1 and the time-saving game state B entered at trigger 2. This makes it easier to tell which trigger caused the transition to the time-saving game state, and also prevents the time-saving game state from becoming monotonous due to differences in the background image and BGM.

In FIG. 66, the background image and BGM during the time-saving play state are different between the time-saving play state A entered at trigger 1 and the time-saving play state B entered at trigger 2, but the background image and BGM during the time-saving play state may be the same between the time-saving play state A entered at trigger 1 and the time-saving play state B entered at trigger 2. In this way, there is no need to change the background image or BGM depending on the trigger, which contributes to reducing data.

(Regarding the presentation mode in the normal game state after the time-saving game state ends)
Next, the presentation mode in the normal gaming state after the time-saving gaming state ends will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Note that up to timing (b), the content is the same as that in Fig. 66, for example, and therefore the description will be omitted.

When the time-saving game state A entered at trigger 1 and the time-saving game state B entered at trigger 2 end at timing (b), the game transitions to the normal game state. In the normal game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends, the game transitions to the special mode (presentation mode E in FIG. 5) as the presentation mode.

This special mode (presentation mode E) is designed to be entered only when the normal game state is resumed immediately after the time-saving game state has ended. For example, in the normal game state after the special mode has ended, even if it is possible to switch between presentation modes A, B, C, and D (all normal modes), it is not possible to switch to the special mode.

In other words, the special mode is positioned as a special presentation mode that can only be entered when the normal game state is resumed shortly after the time-saving game state has ended. In this way, by providing a presentation mode that can only be entered when the normal game state is resumed shortly after the time-saving game state has ended, it is possible to display an unfamiliar background image, etc. to the player, giving the player the feeling that the time-saving game state is still continuing. This is intended to prevent players from quitting play once the time-saving game state has ended.

The special mode ends when a specified number of pattern change games (e.g., 20 times) have been played, and timing (c) indicates the timing when the specified number of pattern change games have been played. Then, at timing (c), the special mode ends and a transition to the normal mode (e.g., presentation mode A) occurs.

In this way, regardless of the trigger for transitioning to the time-saving play state, once the time-saving play state ends, the game will always transition to the special mode. This, for example, can increase the opportunities for transitioning to the special mode, further enhancing gameplay enjoyment. In particular, when useful information is suggested in the special mode (for example, when the setting suggestion presentation described above is performed), it is effective to increase the opportunities for transition in this way.

(Time chart 2 explaining the time-saving game state A entered at the trigger 1 and the time-saving game state B entered at the trigger 2)
Next, the time-saving game state A entered at the trigger 1 and the time-saving game state B entered at the trigger 2 will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a simplified time chart for explaining the relationship between the advantageous degree between the time-saving game state A (in appearance) entered at the trigger 1 and the time-saving game state B entered at the trigger 2.

First, it is assumed that trigger 1 indicates that special symbol A is confirmed at timing (a), and that the sub-symbol combination of "444" is confirmed. After that, the winning game continues until timing (b). When the winning game ends at timing (b), the game transitions to the time-saving AOP, and when the time-saving AOP ends at timing (c), the game transitions to time-saving game state A.

In the time-saving game state A, for example, a background image of a car driving on a road (a background image suggesting that the game is in the time-saving game state A) is displayed on the image display device 26. Also, the speaker 10 outputs the time-saving BGM 1 corresponding to the background image.
In this way, the appearance of the image display device 26 and the background music output from the speaker 10 correspond to the time-saving gaming state A, but the actual gaming state is the guaranteed bonus gaming state.

Next, it is assumed that trigger 2 occurs when the play count counter for activating time-saving play state B reaches "898" at timing (a) and the special symbol D is confirmed and displayed. Then, the time-saving BOP is performed from timing (a) to timing (b), and the game transitions to time-saving play state B from timing (b). Then, the same background image and BGM as trigger 1 are output. Note that in the case of trigger 2, the actual play state is never a guaranteed play state, and always becomes a time-saving play state (time-saving play state B).

Comparing trigger 1 and trigger 2, the background image and BGM during the time-saving play state are the same for time-saving play state A entered by trigger 1 and time-saving play state B entered by trigger 2, but trigger 1 also includes the possibility that the actual play state is a special probability play state. As a result, between time-saving play state A entered by trigger 1 and time-saving play state B entered by trigger 2, there are cases where time-saving play state A entered by trigger 1 is more advantageous. Therefore, although the number of times that can be played in the time-saving play state is fewer in time-saving play state A, it is possible to achieve a balance with time-saving play state B, which has a greater number of times that can be played in the time-saving play state (dispelling the impression that only time-saving play state B, which has a greater number of times, is advantageous).

(Example of updating the game number counter for activating time-saving game state B)
Next, an example of updating the play count counter for activating the time-saving play state B (see FIG. 9) will be described with reference to FIG.

Timing (a) is the timing when time-saving game state A ends. Therefore, at timing (a), the play count counter for activating time-saving game state B is "100", and the normal game state starts from timing (a).

At timing (b), it is assumed that a game ball has entered the first start hole 21 and a symbol change game corresponding to the ball has been executed. In this case, a prize ball is paid out for the ball entering the first start hole 21, and the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B is incremented by "1."

At timing (c), it is assumed that a game ball has entered the second start hole 22 and a symbol change game corresponding to the ball has been executed. In this case, a prize ball is paid out for the ball entering the second start hole 22, and the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B is incremented by "1."

In this way, the play count counter for activating time-saving play state B is updated when a ball enters the first start hole 21 and a symbol change game corresponding to the ball is executed in the normal play state after counting "100" times in time-saving play state A, and is also updated when a ball enters the second start hole 22 and a symbol change game corresponding to the ball is executed.

With this configuration, if the game ball happens to land in the second starting hole 22 during normal game play, the player can receive a special symbol hit determination process based on the ball landing in the second starting hole 22 (which is more advantageous than the first starting hole 21), and the number of plays counter for activating the time-saving game state B is also updated, giving the player a sense of accomplishment and further increasing interest in the game.

The update example in FIG. 69 is particularly suitable for use with a board configuration in which the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22 are arranged vertically next to each other, and it is possible to score the ball with a left-handed (or right-handed) hit into either starting hole.

(Example of updating the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B (modification example 1))
Next, an example (variation 1) of updating the play count counter for activating the time-saving play state B (see FIG. 9) will be described with reference to FIG.

Timing (a) is the timing when time-saving game state A ends. Therefore, at timing (a), the play count counter for activating time-saving game state B is "100", and the normal game state starts from timing (a).

At timing (b), it is assumed that a game ball has entered the first start hole 21 and a symbol change game corresponding to the ball has been executed. In this case, a prize ball is paid out for the ball entering the first start hole 21, and the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B is incremented by "1."

Timing (c) and timing (d) show that two game balls entered the second starting hole 22 when the second starting hole 22 was opened once at 0.9 seconds. In other words, timing (c) is the first ball entering, and timing (d) is the second ball entering.

In this case, timing (c) can be treated in the same way as timing (c) in FIG. 69. However, the second ball entering at timing (d) is treated as invalid. In other words, the symbol change game corresponding to the second ball entering is not executed, no prize balls are paid out for the ball entering the second starting hole 22, and the number of games counter for activating time-saving game state B is not updated. As an example, it has been said that two game balls enter with one opening of the second starting hole 22, but of course the third and subsequent balls are also treated as invalid.

This configuration acts as a deterrent against, for example, fraudulently opening the second start hole 22 to receive the special symbol winning determination process based on the ball entering the second start hole 22, or updating the play count counter for activating the time-saving play state B.

The update example in FIG. 70 is suitable for both a board configuration in which the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22 are arranged vertically next to each other, and the ball can be scored with a left-handed hit (or a right-handed hit) into either starting hole, and a board configuration in which the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22 are arranged spaced apart on the left and the ball can be scored with a left-handed hit into the first starting hole 21 and a right-handed hit into the second starting hole 22.

(Example of update of the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B (modification example 2))
Next, an example of updating the play count counter for activating the time-saving play state B (see FIG. 9) (variation 2) will be described with reference to FIG.

Timing (a) is the timing when time-saving game state A ends. Therefore, at timing (a), the play count counter for activating time-saving game state B is "100", and the normal game state starts from timing (a).

At timing (b), it is assumed that a game ball has entered the first start hole 21 and a symbol change game corresponding to the ball has been executed. In this case, a prize ball is paid out for the ball entering the first start hole 21, and the game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B is incremented by "1."

And while timing (c) indicates that a game ball has entered the second starting hole 22, in the update example of FIG. 71, even if it is the first ball to have entered, it may be treated the same as timing (d) of FIG. 70.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the player is not playing optimally, the symbol variation game will not be executed, prize balls will not be paid out, and the play count counter for activating time-saving play state B will not be updated, thereby informing the player that he or she is not playing optimally and encouraging the player to play optimally.

The update example in FIG. 71 is particularly suitable for use with a board configuration in which the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22 are spaced apart from each other on the left and the ball can be hit into the first starting hole 21 with a left-handed hit and into the second starting hole 22 with a right-handed hit.

The details of the means and the like described in the gaming machine will now be described.
a starting port (e.g., a first starting port 21, a second starting port 22) formed in a game area (e.g., a game area 7) through which a game ball can flow down; a determining means (e.g., a main CPU 101 performing a special symbol winning determination process) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player (e.g., a winning game) based on the game ball entering the starting port; an identifying information display means (e.g., a first special symbol display 27a, a second special symbol display 27b) for starting a variable display of identifying information (e.g., a special symbol) based on the game ball entering the starting port and stopping the variable display as the variable time elapses to derive the result of the determination (e.g., displaying a definite result); and a transition is possible based on the result of the determination (e.g., the result of the determination of the special symbol winning determination process), and the number of times the variable display has been performed since the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the start of the time-saving game state A) has satisfied a predetermined number of times (e.g., 898 times). a specific game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 101) for controlling a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state A, a time-saving game state B) to which a transition can be made based on the specific game state control means, a counting storage means (e.g., a game number counter for activating the time-saving game state B provided in the main RAM 103) for counting and storing the number of times the variable display has occurred, an initialization means (e.g., a process for initializing an area of the main RAM 103 by turning on a RAM clear SW 105), and a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control board 200) for controlling a predetermined presentation, wherein, when the number of times the variable display has occurred is not initialized by the initialization means, the presentation control means is capable of executing a suggestion presentation (e.g., a time-saving B suggestion presentation) suggesting that the initialization has not been performed in the predetermined number of times of the variable display (e.g., the first pattern changing game after the opening of the gaming establishment).

In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine has been used as an example for explanation, but the contents described in this embodiment can also be applied to a reel-type game machine (slot machine), a jan-ball game machine, or an arrange-ball game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 26 Image display device 100 Main control board 200 Performance control board

Claims (1)

An acquisition means for acquiring judgment information when a game ball enters a starting hole;
a determination means for determining whether or not a special game advantageous to a player is to be executed based on the determination information;
a pre-determination means for pre-determining the determination information before the determination;
A storage means for storing the judgment information on which the judgment has not been performed;
An adjustment operation means for adjusting a volume value;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means includes:
When power supply is resumed, a restoration display can be displayed on the display means;
When the volume value adjustment operation is performed, the volume value adjustment process of the sound output means can be performed,
When an adjustment operation of the volume value is performed while the recovery display is being displayed, the volume value adjustment process can be performed.
When the volume value adjustment operation is performed, an adjustment sound can be output from the sound output means,
When the volume value is at a maximum value and an adjustment operation is performed to increase the volume value, the adjustment sound is not output,
The display means is capable of displaying reserved information according to the number of reserved memories,
According to the advance determination, second reserved information suggesting that the special game is more likely to be executed than the first reserved information can be displayed, and the second reserved information can be displayed in a specific color different from the first reserved information;
When the second hold information is displayed, a predetermined sound effect can be output from the sound output means, and a predetermined light emitting means can be made to emit light in a light emitting color corresponding to the specific color,
When a game ball enters the starting hole during the display of the recovery display and it is determined to display the second reserved information in accordance with the advance judgment, the second reserved information is not made visible, the predetermined sound effect is output, and the predetermined light-emitting means is caused to emit light in a light-emitting color corresponding to the specific color , and the second reserved information is made visible after the display of the recovery display is terminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images